Elektronic-Handbook

Contents Page: 1

Modular Electronic Handbook

0. Table of contents

1. Dimmers; Switches and Push Buttons

1.1 Selection guide for dimmers

1.2 Theoretical fundamentals1.2.1 Diode and triac1.2.2 Fuses1.2.3 Radio interference suppression1.2.4 Insulation measurement1.2.5 Infra-red remote control1.2.5.1 The multi-channel-infra-red transmit / receive principle1.2.5.2 The transmission media "Infra-red light"1.2.5.3 The switched infra red light used as carrier signal1.2.5.4 The coding system

1.3 Electronic switches and push buttons1.3.1 Switches1.3.1.1 Push-relay switch1.3.1.2 IR-switches1.3.1.3 IR-recessed switches1.3.2 Push button1.3.2.1 IR-push buttons with single pulse1.3.2.2 IR-push button with permanent pulse1.3.2.3 IR-extension push button 4channel Eb

1.4 Phase-cut-on control dimmer1.4.1 Dimmer with rotary or push knob1.4.1.1 Dimmer for incandescent lamps1.4.1.2 Low voltage dimmer for conventional transformers1.4.1.3 Dimmer for fluorescent lamps1.4.1.4 Speed regulator1.4.2 Dimmer with touch operation1.4.2.1 Touch dimmer for incandescent lamps1.4.2.2 Low voltage touch dimmer for conventional transformers1.4.3 IR-dimmer1.4.3.1 IR-dimmer for incandescent lamps1.4.3.2 IR-low voltage dimmer for conventional transformers1.4.4 Power extensions1.4.4.1 Power Booster UP (flush)1.4.4.2 Low voltage recessed Power Booster

1.5 Phase-cut-off-control dimmer for TRONIC-transformers1.5.1 Dimmer with rotary or push knob1.5.1.1 TRONIC-dimmer1.5.2 Dimmer with/for touch operation1.5.2.1 TRONIC-touch dimmer1.5.2.2 TRONIC-recessed dimmer1.5.3 Remote control dimmer1.5.3.1 IR-TRONIC-touch dimmer1.5.4 Power extension1.5.4.1 TRONIC-recessed Power Booster1.5.5 Protective functions of TRONIC-dimmers1.5.6 TRONIC-light control system1.5.7 Instructions for installation

Contents Page: 2

1.6 Electronic potentiometer for 10 V control input1.6.1 Principle operation1.6.2 Installation rules1.6.3 Circuit dimension1.6.4 Behaviour in case of installation faults1.6.5 Technical data

1.7 Additional devices of the remote control system1.7.1 IR-handheld transmitter1.7.2 IR-wall transmitter1.7.3 IR-receiver for flush devices

2. Observer

2.1 General fundamentals2.1.1 Light and sensor2.1.2 Construction of the observers2.1.3 Dependence on the range by means of physical factors2.1.3.1 Fitting height, sensor inclination, terrain2.1.3.2 Motion direction2.1.3.3 Detection at the range limits2.1.3.4 Environmental influences2.1.3.5 Summary2.1.4 Function of the observer2.1.5 Electronic circuit, Principle function2.1.6 Influences on the observer by means of the switched lamp2.1.7 Observers (Motion detectors) also used in alarm systems?

2.2 Single observer for surface mounting (AP)2.2.1 Observer 702.2.1.1 Test setting2.2.2 Observer 1102.2.2.1 Specification of the surveillance field2.2.2.2 Spark absorber2.2.2.3 Set of blinds Observer 1102.2.2.4 Test setting2.2.3 Observer 180/102.2.3.1 Limitation of the surveillance field2.2.3.2 Test setting2.2.4 Observer 180/162.2.5 Observer 2402.2.5.1 Sensivity setting2.2.5.2 Push-on blinds2.2.5.3 Test settings

Contents Page: 3

2.3 Modular design Observer 180 UP2.3.1 Usage2.3.1.1 Version 1: Surveillance field of an installation height 1.10m2.3.1.2 Version 2: Surveillance field of an installation height 2.20m2.3.1.3 Waterproof construction2.3.2 Insert with triac2.3.3 Insert with relay contact2.3.4 Standard attachment2.3.5 Comfort attachment2.3.6 Operation with extensions2.3.6.1 Why active extensions ?2.3.6.2 Extension insert2.3.6.3 Attachment for the insert (System attachment)

2.4 Observer system2.4.1 System power units2.4.1.1 System power unit AP (surface mounting)2.4.1.2 System power unit REG 1channel2.4.1.3 System power unit REG 2channel2.4.2 System sensors2.4.3 Connection2.4.4 Set-up of the Observer system2.4.5 Principle construction of the Observer system

2.5 Powerful features of the Observers

3. Devices with Automatic Time Function

3.1 Electronic controller for shutter and blinds3.1.1 General3.1.2 Principle function3.1.3 Technical construction3.1.4 Fitting and installation3.1.5 Initial set-up3.1.6 Operation3.1.6.1 Display and operation elements3.1.6.2 Programming3.1.6.3 Types of operation3.1.6.4 Connection of several motors in parallel

3.2 Electronic Timer3.2.1 General3.2.2 Installation

3.3 Graphical presentation of the operating menu

3.4 Technical Data

Contents Page: 4

4. Electronic Transformer

4.1 Application

4.2 Principle

4.3 Specification of the TRONIC-transformer4.3.1 Block circuit4.3.2 Output voltage4.3.3 Secondary wire4.3.4 Switch-on behaviour4.3.5 Connecting TRONIC-transformers together4.3.6 Installation4.3.7 Dimmer operation4.3.8 Operation at DC voltage

4.4 Overvoltage protection in LV-installations

5. Current guard for control of low voltage rope and pole systems

5.1 Danger and safety requirements of rope and pole systems

5.2 Current guard5.2.1 Function5.2.2 Operating the current guard5.2.3 Combination of dimmer or TRONIC-transformer

6. Electronic Ballast for miniature Fluorescent Lamps

6.1 Physics of the FM-lamp6.2 The technology of the FM-lamp6.3 Device variants6.4 Technical data

7. Overvoltage Protection in Electrical Installations

7.1 General7.1.1 Overvoltages due to lightning strikes7.1.2 Overvoltages due to electrostatic discharge7.1.3 Overvoltages due to electromagnetic pulses

7.2 Ascertain the possible overvoltages7.2.1 External overvoltages7.2.2 Internal overvoltages7.2.3 Test pulses

7.3 Components for overvoltage protection7.3.1 Gas-filled arresters7.3.2 Varistor (VDR-resistors)7.3.3 Suppressor diodes7.3.4 Combination of arc-filled arrester and varistors

7.4 Devices with overvoltage protection7.4.1 Protection against overvoltage built-in the devices7.4.2 TRONIC-overvoltage protection module

Contents Page: 5

7.4.3 Socket outlet with surge voltage protection7.4.4 Line filter with surge protection

7.5 Graduated protection

7.6 Insulation measurement

7.7 Notes for installation7.7.1 Coupling of transients7.7.2 Propagation of transients

7.8 Technical data

Supplement

Contents Page: 6

Specification of technical data:

The specification of technical data according to the product is described without guarantee in thishandbook. The data have been up-to-date at the time publishing the chapter, but there might be changesin the meantime to follow the technical progress, that have influences onto the product then . So, slightdifferences in the data may occur. The binding technical data for the product can be taken from themanual delivered with the product.

Chap.: 1.1 Page: 1

1. Dimmers, Switches, Push buttons

1.1 Selection guide for dimmersThe requirements on a modern lighting equipmentwith special functions become increasingly higher.In many cases you have to guarantee the highlight intensity and, for example also to adjust anice atmosphere in the evening hours.Modern lightning ideas, as the use of low voltagehalogen lamps will create special requirements ona lighting control device.To guarantee faultless function, for example anoptimal degree of handling you have to select thecorrect dimmer for the installed light.

The following list provides a selecting guide to theuser, which gives information about the bestdimmer according to its special requirements.

Dimmer type suitable for kind of load:resistive inductive capacitive

Dimmer forincandescent lamp

l

Dimmer forfluorescent lamp l l

Dimmer for LowVoltage

l l

TRONIC-Dimmer l l

The above mentioned dimmer types are devidedinto two different principles of function.Incandescent lamp dimmers, fluorescent lampdimmers and low voltage dimmers are operatingas phase-cut-on dimmers and TRONIC dimmersare operating as phase-cut-off dimmers.

Phase-cut-on principleThe dimmer is blocking the current flow of thelamp at each sine half wave's beginning, and it isnon-conductive. The triac (that is the electronicswitch within the dimmer) is switched-on after atime that is adjustable by the user and the currentflows through the connected lamps. The triac isswitched-off with the next zero crossing and thelamp is also switched-off. This procedure isrepeated each sine half wave, that means 100times per second. So the brightness of the lampcan be controlled infinitely variable.This principle can be used for dimming ofinductive loads. Dimming inductive loads as thereare low voltage halogen lamps with normaltransformers or fluorescent lamps with inductiveballasts, will cause a voltage peak in the switch-offmoment.

This voltage peak is suppressed when switching-off in the zero crossing point with a phase-cut-ondimmer.

Phase-cut-off principle:The lamps are switched-on in the zero crossing ofthe sine half wave and are switched-off after atime that is adjustable by the user. No voltagedisturbances can be created when switching-offbecause the voltage has the voltage zero.This principle can be used for dimming TRONICtransformers. The phase-cut-off dimmersexplained in this handbook are therefore calledTRONIC dimmers.TRONIC transformers have an input circuit that isslightly capacitive. A current peak is created in theswitch-on moment by means of the capacitiveload. This current peak is suppressed byswitching-on with a phase-cut-off dimmer in thezero crossing point.

Incandescent lamps are resistive loads and areable to be dimmed by both of the abovementioned principles.The user is free to select any kind of dimmers fordimming incandescent lamps.An advantage in many cases is the choice of aphase-cut-off dimmer. If lamps will reach their endof life it can happen that the filament burnsthrough and a higher switch-on current is created.This is resulting from the ionisation of the lampgas, and a spark appears. The fine-wire fuse ofthe phase-cut-on dimmer can be blown by thehigher switch-on current and must be replaced bya new one.TRONIC-phase-cut-off dimmer contains anintegrated electronic fuse and because of thisthere is no need of service.Phase-cut-on dimmer is designed with a radiofrequency interference choke (RFI choke) toreduce the radio frequency interferences in thetriac switching moment. These RFI chokes can berecognised by a small noise that can be amplifiedin bad installations by means of resonance.TRONIC-phase-cut-off dimmers are staying for a'soft start' because of its principle a RFI chokes isnot necessary. Noise can not occur.So TRONIC-dimmers are very interestingalternatives to dimm incandescent lamps or alsolow voltage halogen lamps.

Chap.: 1.1 Page: 2

Before describing the technology of different types of dimmers in the following chapters a summary isgiven for the selection of the best dimmer that may control the desired load of lamps:

Dimmer Power Load

Incandes-cent lamp

HV Halogenlamp

LVHalogen lamp

Fluorescentlamp

Dimmer with turn-off switch

Incandescent lamp dimmer 60-400 W l

Dimmer with push-change switch

Incandescent lamp dimmer 60-400 W l

Incandescent lamp dimmer 60-600 W l

Incandescent lamp dimmer 25-1000 W l

LV dimmer 20-500 VA l l l

TRONIC-dimmer 10-315 W l l l

Fluorescent lamp dimmer 25-600 VA l l

Fluorescent lamp dimmer 25-1000 VA l l

Touch dimmer

Incandescent lamp touch dimmer 60-500 W l

LV touch dimmer 20-500 VA l l l

IR-TRONIC touch dimmer 20-315 W l l l

Recessed dimmer

TRONIC recessed dimmers 50-700 W l l l

Power booster

LV recessed power booster 100-600 VA l max. 500 W l

TRONIC recessed power booster 100-700 W l l l

Recessed power booster, flushmoun.

25-600 W l l

Cord dimmer with rotary pot.

Incandescent lamp cord dimmer 40-200 W l

LV cord dimmer 20-100 VA l l

Cord dimmer with push pot.

Incandescent lamp cord dimmer 60-500 W l

LV cord dimmer 20-100 VA l l l

LV cord dimmer 60-300 VA l l l

Chap.: 1.2 Page: 1

1.2 Theoretical fundamentals1.2.1 Diode and triacBesides the well-known components as resistors,capacitors, chokes, potentiometers, glimm lamps,etc. also so-called semiconductor components areused. The simplest one is the diode.

Figure: Circuit symbol of a diode

The direction of the arrow indicates that it allowsthe current to flow in only one direction. The diodeis low resistive when a current flows in thedirection of the arrow ( the voltage drop atnominal current is 0.7 V). It is high resistive whena current flows towards the direction of the arrow("Reverse current", depending on temperature andvoltage, size from nA to mA).

In the following figure an equivalent circuit isshown which is physically not exactly correct. Tosimplify the thoughts, those complex and non-linear procedures in the diode are shown asresistive loads which influences the current inreverse and forward direction:

D RD

RS

IS

ID

Figure: Equivalent circuit of a diode

D is the ideal diode ( forward resistance is zero,reverse resistance is ), RD is the forwardresistance of a real semiconductor diode, RS is itsreverse resistance, RS causes that the reversecurrent Is flows, RD is mainly responsible for thelosses and the temperature rise. A power of1 Watt is generated at a voltage drop of 1 V at R Dand a forward current 1A. This power iscompletely transferred into temperature.

G

A K

Figure: Circuit symbol of as thyristor

The above figure shows the symbol of a"controlled diode", which is generally calledthyristor. Apart from the anode terminal A and thecathode terminal K, the thyristor has additionally agate terminal G. In reverse direction ( + at thecathode ) the thyristor has a behaviour as anormal diode. That means only a small reversecurrent is flowing. In forward direction two statesare possible. At first the thyristor is also "blocked"in off-state. Only if you let a current flow into thegate terminal, the thyristor becomes low-resistivein the forward direction. So its behaviour is thenequal to a normal diode in forward direction(including on-state losses, temperature, etc.).

The thyristor once " fired " (= switched into lowresistive state) by a small gate current pulse staysas long low resistive as a forward current isflowing. Thus a thyristor can be turned on by agate current, but it can not be turned off.

The following figure shows a thyristor connectedto the mains voltage :

I

1

2

230 V ~

Figure: Thyristor at the mains

As long as you do not apply a gate current pulse,the thyristor blocks in both directions. Only a lowreverse current is flowing through the lamp loadwhat has to be neglected. The thyristor is turnedon, if a small current pulse is given to the gatewhile the positive sine half wave is active(terminal 1 is positive against terminal 2, so that isthe forward direction for a thyristor). A load currentI can flow. The mains voltage is zero at the end ofthe positive half wave and with that also thecurrent I. But if the current I falls under a specifiedvalue ("holding current", for example 10mA), thethyristor itself switches into the reverse direction.If the current should flow again in the next positivehalf wave, a new firing is necessary. It means,that a new gate pulse has to be applied.

Basically a thyristor can let the current flow into anonly direction. You can imagine a thyristor as arelay in self-holding circuit in series with a diode,as shown in figure, thyristor function imitation.:

Chap.: 1.2 Page: 2

A

G

K

W2W1

Figure: Thyristor function imitation

If the anode has a positive potential against thecathode no current will flow because the switch Sis open. A short current pulse into the gate, whichwill flow through the relay coil w1, will attract therelay. The switch will close and the load currentthen will flow through coil w2, thus the relay stayson although the gate current through w1 willsuddenly be interrupted. Solely if the currentthrough w2 is too small to hold the relay ("holdingcurrent") the switch S will be opened again.

Alternating currents (in both directions) can onlybe switched by thyristors if you design for everydirection a single thyristor as shown in thefollowing figure.

230 V ~

Figure: Antiparallel circuit of thyristors

Because it is very expensive, triacs are used toswitch smaller power (up to some kW) in themains, see figure circuit symbol of a triac.

230 V ~

Figure: Circuit symbol of a triac

These components only have one gate (so a triacis not only "two thyristors in one housing", so youshould have two gate terminals that must becontrolled alternately with gate pulses of differentpolarities. You can see this in the figureAntiparallel circuit of thyristors). A mechanicalequivalent circuit is shown in figure Thyristorfunction imitation in which only the diode iscancelled.

Again the triac is fired by current pulses at thegate (but now with a polarity you like) and itswitches off if the load current falls under thevalue of the holding current.

In the following equivalent circuit you will find areverse resistor RP and an on-state resistorbecause in principle the triac can also be shownas switching diodes (but this is strongly simplified).

A

G

K

W2W1

RS

RD

Figure: Triac function imitation

The triac is no "ideal" switch. We would requirefrom such a switch RD = 0 (so no voltage drop andtemperature rise should occur) and RS = (sothat really no current will flow in open state). Inthis context conventional mechanical switches arealso not "ideal".It is true, that their reverse current of an openedswitch and their voltage drop of a closed switch issmaller than triac. Therefore the triac operatesfaster than each electromechanical componentand above al practically without wear. Only withthat phase-cut-on controls are possible, in which aload current has to be switched 100 times persecond that will be possible only for a limited timewith a mechanical switch.

A further function typically for triacs can be takenfrom the figure Triac function imitation. In this yousee the differences to the mechanical switch: Ifthe voltage between the terminals A and K will betoo high, the reverse current through RS allows the"relay" to attract. The triac then switches withoutbeing fired by the gate. Because the triac blocks in

Chap.: 1.2 Page: 3

the next current zero crossing, current is onlyflowing for the duration of a mains half wavethrough the load in such unintentional triggerings.Such overvoltage peaks in the mains can occur asa short "flash" by means of incandescent lamps, iffor example inductive loads are switched.

230 V ~T

R

CDi

Figure: Triac firing

The figure Triac firing shows a simple circuit whatis used to create current pulses to fire the triac. Atfirst, the capacitor is loaded after each zerocrossing for the time of the mains half wave.When the diac break-over voltage is reached, thediac becomes suddenly low-resistive. Through itthe capacitor transfers its charge to the gate of thetriac. The triac is triggered and stays conductive tothe next zero crossing. In the following oppositemains half wave the operation is repeated.

The moment, when the capacitor reaches the gatetrigger voltage can be varied by changing theresistor value R

1.2.2 FusesAs triacs have - like all other semiconductorcomponents have a non-neglectable on-stateresistor (see figure Triac function imitation) - theyare warmed up by the current flow.Because of the tiny dimensions the thermalcapacity is very small. That means that the triac iswarmed up very quick. The component will bedestroyed if a specified temperature limit isexceeded (silicon semiconductors approx. 180°C,components in plastic housing often with ahousing temperature of 90 ...100°C).The semiconductors are selected by the productmanufacturer. When the product is stressed bymeans of the permitted load, the temperature limitwill not be reached. In cases of overloading orextreme high ambient temperature a destructionby overheating may be possible.

An unintentional, extreme high overload oftencomes up, when a filament of an incandescentlamp burns through. Breaking the filament, the fill-gas is ionised by the appearing spark, and an arcin the lamp occurs which is practically a shortcircuit. By that, the current in the lamp and in the

connected triac increases suddenly to extremehigh values. The semiconductor material is heatedin so-called hot spots on temperatures that arehigher than the allowed limit, and before a normalfuse element will be blown and a short circuitcurrent is switched-off. To protect the triac fromdestruction under these conditions, a fuse isconnected before which will be blown in case ofshort circuit before the triac temperature exceedsits limit. The fuse has to be designed on the otherhand, that it withstands momentary overloads bymeans of switching-on. Switch-on currents up to10 times of the nominal current appear because ofthe cold resistance of the lamp filament, but thetriac will withstand without any damage.

Finally the fuse has to distinguish not onlydifferent momentary overloads but also has tobehave correctly in case of permanent overloads.

The triac would become too hot if too manyincandescent lamps are connected to a dimmerand the total amount of power exceeds thenominal power of the dimmer. For this reason thefuse has to trip early enough to switch-off also dueto short time overloads.

These different requirements can only be fulfilledsimultaneously by a fuse with exactly definedvalues, whose timing is correctly designed to therelevant dimmer or switch type. For example afuse is used in a touch dimmer with thecharacteristic value T2H250. That means:Slow fusewith 2A nominal current250 Volt nominal voltageand a breaking capacity H, that means a currentof 1500 A can be switched off without any damageat the housing of the fuse.

Changing the fuse, these 4 characteristic valueshave to be observed absolutely and must fit withthe values marked on the product. Otherwisedamages of the dimmer or even fire can begenerated.

1.2.3 Radio interference suppressionEach current or voltage curve being different froma sine wave has current and voltage componentswith higher frequency. The steeper the curves are,the greater the higher frequencies exist which thecurves contain. If a mechanical switch is closed,the current rises suddenly, that means with a highsteepness beginning from zero to its nominalvalue. This is the reason you can hear a"switching click" in a FM receiver (approx. 100MHz). This sole noise is not be sensed as atroublesome. So in switches no radio interferencesuppression is necessary.

Chap.: 1.2 Page: 4

Semiconductor components as triacs do notcreate such steep current or voltage rise asmechanical switches. The disturbances generatedby them normally do not fall into the FM range.Otherwise triacs have to be triggered again inevery current half wave. In the difference to amechanical switch which generates only sole, butpowerful disturbances up to very high frequenciesin the switching moment, in the mains with 50 Hzthe triac switches-on and off 100 times persecond, and so it does not generate a disturbing"click" but a continuos disturbing noise. This noisedisturbs intensively radio receivers and thus thelaw requires a wide suppression.

At time, requirements are designed by theEuropean standardisation committees to limit theradio frequency disturbances in all frequencyranges.

The standard DIN VDE 0875 Part 14 (equal withEN 55014) describes radio frequency behaviour ofhousehold appliances and has to be applied alsofor the mentioned dimmers. The lowest radiofrequencies exist at 150 kHz and so the limits ofthe allowed voltage disturbances of householdappliances start at 150 kHz. Three RFI classes G,N, K (large, normal, small class ) have been fixed.Generally it is required that products of the houseinstallation have to meet the RFI class N. Adisturbing voltage of 2 mV on the mains wire ispermitted in the frequency range 150 kHz to 500kHz a maximum . In the higher frequency rangethe limit is fixed with 1 mV. This kind of voltagedefinition is defined as measured value, which canonly be displayed by special radio frequencymeasurement equipment.

The disturbing voltages are often given as amultiple of 1µV in dB (2 mV are then equal to 66dB, 1mV is equal to 60 dB).

A series connection of a choke (inductance) in thecircuit is an essential measure, because it reducesthe current steepness and the cause of thegeneration of higher disturbing frequencies. Avoltage divider is formed by means of this chokeD and the anti-interference capacitor C. Thehigher the frequencies are, the more efficient isthe voltage divider, as it is shown in the figureSuppression of radio interferences. It is anexample of a lamp circuit switched by a triac.

230 V ~

TD

C

U1

U2

Figure: Suppression of radio interferences

The resistance of a choke is rising at higherfrequencies. The resistance of a capacitor isfalling at higher frequencies. The high frequencydisturbing voltage U1 (approx. 1 V at 150 kHz),generated by the triac so sees in D a highresistance. On the other hand C is low -resistivefor these voltages.In approximation the disturbing voltage U 1 is setdown to U2 according to the ratio of theresistances.

The components D and C have simply to bechosen, that U2 stays below the allowed limit ofthe disturbance limit in all operating conditions.

This simple circuit for the reduction of the radiointerferences contains many difficulties that cantechnically be solved today only in anunsatisfactory way. As the figure shows, the loadcurrent flows through the choke. The iron core ofthe coil and the copper wire of the winding createlosses. These losses are a wanted heat sourcewhich power is normally higher than the powerdissipation of the triac itself. But the upper limit ofthe electronic installation device is exclusivelyfixed by the temperature of the components,every additional heat source is unwanted becauseit will decrease the switching power of device.

The increase of the "leakage current", for exampleof an electronic switch is an additional unwantedfeature of radio suppression components. Asshown in figure Suppression of radiointerferences, the anti-interference capacitor isconnected in series with the load to the mains.So a current is flowing although the triac isswitched-off. The current flows along with the triacreverse current through the load and is normally ina range of approx. 10 mA.

An additional difficulty comes up, when the triac isstaying in the on-state and the capacitor C forms aso-called parallel oscillating circuit with inductanceD, as the following figure will show it:

230 V ~T

D

C

i

Figure: Parallel oscillating circuit

An alternating current i is flowing in a paralleloscillating circuit with a frequency, which only

Chap.: 1.2 Page: 5

depending on C and D and it is substantiallyhigher than the mains frequency.If this alternating current - in the figure markedwith i - "falls through zero", that means itsdirection will change, the triac will blockautomatically (see chapter "Diodes and triacs").

If the triac is triggered at the beginning of a mainshalf wave, so it will not - as it is wanted andexpected - block at the end of the mains half. Itwill block nearly just after the half wave of thesubstantially higher frequency, with which theparallel circuit is oscillating.

In parallel to the oscillating circuit C-D only theload is connected as an attenuator. The highfrequency alternating current is not only flowingbetween the choke and the capacitor. It is alsoflowing through the "resistive load", where theenergy is transferred into "current heat" and this istaken from the oscillating circuit. If L is so low-resistive, that the amplitude of i is lower than thecurrent value of mains frequency load current,then a premature zero crossing will not occur inthe triac and the circuit will operate without faults.

You have to guarantee that the load is alwayssufficiently low-resistive. This is the reason, aminimum power is fixed in the data sheet ofdevices operating with phase-cut-on circuits andhaving interference suppression components,apart from the maximum power.

It is important, that the attenuation of theoscillating circuit can only be successful byresistive loads. Incandescent lamps and alsohalogen lamps directly connected to the mainsform such resistive loads. Because of that it isonly to be observed that the fixed minimum loadwill not be too low.The brightness control of fluorescent lamps hasanother behaviour. They form no pure resistiveload with the ballast .

For this a "resistive basic ballast" is alwaysrequired which is to connect in parallel to loadcircuit.

For this purpose you should always useincandescent lamps as a resistive basic ballast.Even high power resistors are not suitable,because they are too large or become too hot. Inaddition, it is to see that the effective load that canbe calculated from the resistor value (Ohm) has adifference to the marked power (Watt) on theresistor. A resistor defied with a maximum powerof 25W may not have a power of 25W at analternating current of 230V. In no case you shoulduse other devices than incandescent lamps, evenif we call them a basic ballast.

This difficulties are more or less relevant to thedesigner of the product and to the installer.Besides of this, the radio suppression choke is aspecial problem to the user by an unwantedaudible noise. This problem is caused by the basicharmonic of 100 Hz and by the harmonicsgenerated by the phase-cut-on.

This noise is also known in the use oftransformers or other inductive components. Itbased on the magnetostriction of the corematerial. That is a small distortion of the chokeinfluenced by the magnetic field. This magneticfield is alternating by the load current of 100 Hzand so the core is also oscillating with thisfrequency. This is the reason a troublesomeaudible disturbance exists. There are choke coresthat have a less magnetostriction. We call them "mass cores", that are more quiet, but they havesome other unfavourable features (for examplethe "basic ballast" has to be 20% of the maximumload due to the self-attenuation of this cores). Sothey can not be used in every case.

The frequency spectrum of phase-cut-on circuitshas a range from mains frequency (50 Hz) up tothe radio short wave . The radio suppressioncomponents have no influence on frequencieslower than 100 Hz as it is shown in the followingfigure roughly:

Chap.: 1.2 Page: 6

V

100

10

1

1

10

100

mV

0,1100 Hz 1 10 1100 kHz

audible frequency

10 100 MHz

radio frequency

Interference voltage of a phase-cut-on circuit

Interference voltage of a dimmer circuitsuppressed to class N

Envelope curve for line spectrum

Figure: Levels of the interference voltage

But this means also, that all disturbances affectingon the low frequency wires (telephone wires,microphone wires, tape recorder wires,loudspeaker wires, LF measure wires, etc.) willstill exist without reduction.

According to this all the well-known suppressionmeasures for low frequency must be taken intoaccount especially for phase-cut-on devices:

− install no ring wires,− lead no wires being sensitive to interferences

in parallel to the wires with the phase-cut-oncurrent,

− if possible connect devices being sensitive tointerferences and devices operating with thephase-cut-on principle to different outerphases,

− do not install equipments being sensitive tointerferences directly close to a phase-cut-ondevice

− use screening and earthing measures for thewires being sensitive to interferences.

The connection symbols of electronic installationdevices are standardised in DIN VDE 0632 Part501. The following table shows an overview.

Symbol Meaning↑ orL

The arrow is pointing at the electronic device.Connect the phase to this terminal, for example L1.

↓ sometimes also

The arrow is pointing to load.You may sometimes use the symbol "regulated load" for this terminal.In both cases, connect the lamp wire to this terminal.

N Connect the neutral wire to this terminal.This symbol is marked on the terminal of a heating transfomer

Further symbols, but they are not defined in VDE 0632 Part 501 .1, 2 Normally used for the connection of extensions.

The specific function should be read in the installation instruction.

Chap.: 1.2 Page: 7

1.2.4 Insulation measurementThe semiconductor components are located in theload circuit of electronic installation devices, thatmeans they are connected in series with load tothe mains. The reverse resistance of thesecomponents is not infinitely high, as it was shownin the figure Equivalent circuit of a diode. Whiletesting the insulation, devices containing noadditional mechanical switch can simulate aninsulation fault by means of the reverse current ofthe semiconductor components and in addition bymeans of the current of the perhaps existingsuppression components. The load circuit shouldbe disconnected in installations with such devices(disconnect the load wire, unscrew the lamp, etc.).With that, it is guaranteed, that the electroniccomponents will not be damaged by high voltagesgenerated by a hand generator.

1.2.5 Infrared remote control1.2.5.1 The multi-channel-infrared transmit /

receive principleElectronic dimmers, switches and push buttonsoffer the advantage not only to be operated bymeans of the integrated manual operationelements but also by means of electrical signals.These devices have an input circuit thattransforms the corresponding signal into dimming,switching or pushing commands.

We can assign an electronic circuit to the dimmer,switch or push button, which can receive signals

from a radio frequency or infrared remote deviceand transforms them into electric signals. Aremote control is possible without trouble.

In this chapter a wireless infrared remote controlwill be explained. It gives the possibility to set thesame switching or dimming commands from anyplace in a room without connection wires, as it ispossible by an operation "at site".

The figure Multi-channel infrared remote controlshows the principle. A movable handheldtransmitter or a fitted IR wall transmitter serves asan external operation unit. The dimming andswitching signals generated by them aretransformed in a suitable receive electronic. Theyare transferred as a control signal to the dimmeror switch, that is equal to the signal of theoperation key.

The keyboards of the IR transmitter are existing ofup to 8 separate operation keys (depending on thetransmitter type), which can be assigned to 8different channels by means of a 8fold groupswitch (A...H). The receiver only reacts on theoperation of a defined transmit key, which isassigned by the corresponding channeladjustment. So by means of an IR transmitter, it ispossible to control remote up to 64 devices fromone place in a room and regardless from eachother. Further extensions are in preparation,please ask for the current state.

Lamps

Electronic devicesi.e. dimmers, switches etc.

Receive electronicKey

Addr.gr. Achannel 1

Handheld transmitter

A

5 6

7 8

1 2

3 4

HC.B .

Addr.gr. Achannel 2

Addr.gr. Achannel 3

Addr.gr. Achannel 8

Figure: Multi-channel infrared remote control

Chap.: 1.2 Page: 8

1.2.5.2 Transmission media "Infrared light"To design a wireless transmission of signals,different media can be selected, e.g. light, soundor electromagnetic waves.

The question what transmission media may be themost suitable one, can not be answered ingeneral, because advantages and disadvantagesdepend on the special application. The infraredlight is most suitable to control remote dimmersand electronic switches in one room. Manyreasons are found for that:

− infrared light is not visible so that no visualadverse effects exist,

− influences by disturbances are on the lowestlevel using infrared light transmission

− the optoelectronic components used fortransmission and reception of the infraredsignal (semiconductor diodes) have smalldimensions and they are very resistiant againstmechanical shock - important for a handheldtransmitter !

− A small time is used for the transmission of acoded signal, which is necessary for thechannel interpretation.

− infrared light is spreading out only in a singleroom, comes partially through glass, is wellreflected by bright areas- and so it behavesexactly as the visible light.

The figure Function of the IR remote control showsthe transmission way from the physical view.When the transmit keys are operated, a signalpattern is created that is translated into infraredlight by the semiconductor diode. The infrared

light sent out by the transmitter crosses thedistance to the receiver. The receiver alsocontains an optoelectronic semiconductor diode,which transforms the light signal back into theoriginal electrical signal pattern. In the followinginterpretation circuit it can be read out whichchannel, that means also which key, has beenoperated.The duration of the signal marks the kind ofcommand and is corresponding to the operationtime of the transmit key. The relevant switch ordimm command is then connected to electronicdevice.The infrared light used for the remote control lieson the long-wave side of the visible light (incontrast to the ultraviolet light = short wave side)near to the beginning of the thermal radiation.The optoelectronic semiconductor diodes used inthe transmitter and receiver fit together. When anelectric voltage is applied, the transmitting diodegenerates a wave length of 950 nm (nanometer),whereupon the receiving diode reacts verysensitively on that. As a reaction it produces acurrent being proportional to the incidenting light,i.e. an electrical signal is recovered and evaluatedand interpreted by the following circuit. Becauseof the selective behaviour of the receiving diode,the visible light that lies in the range of 400 - 780nm has no influence on the function of the remotecontrol.Nevertheless also visible light can containconsiderable infrared parts, specially artificiallight. So that they do not affect the function, theseparts have to be separated from the transmittedsignal.

Interpretationof the electricalsignal(sensing of thechannel andcommand)

Generationof the electricalsignal

Transformationof the electricalsignal in anIR signal

Recovery oftheelectricalsignal

IR transmissiondistance

Key

to the electronicdevice (e.g. dimmer)

Figure: Function of the remote control

1.2.5.3 The switched infrared light used as the carrier signal

The intensity of the infrared part contained in thevisible light, is almost constant, while it isobserved for a relatively short time. At artificiallight, for example at lamp bulbs' light, it moves inthe 100 Hz rhythm (as well as the visible part, butthe human eye does not notice these variationsbecause it acts too inertly).The intensity of the infrared signal is alternating tomake a better distinction. However, it alternates

very more quickly and powerfully, as it occursusually in the undesirable infrared parts of thevisible light. The transmitted signal is continuouslyswitched on and off, whereby a cycle lasts 2,2 µs(22/10.000.000 seconds). This corresponds to aswitching frequency of 1/2,2 µs =455 kHz. Theratio of the pulse and break times is therefore 1:1.The figure Pulse width modulation shows thetiming of the intensity.

Chap.: 1.2 Page: 9

It is ensured by means of suitable circuitmeasures in the receiver, that only these highfrequent information signals will arrive for furtherprocessing. Thus the most occurring low frequentor constant infrared parts of the visible light haveno influence on the functional safety of the remotecontrol. Still another further advantage is given bymeans of switching-on and off the transmittedsignal:

To achieve a sufficient range, the intensity of thetransmitted signal should be as high as possible.However the possibilities are limited by themaximum allowed operating current of thetransmitting diode. So the maximum achievablelight intensity is depending on the current. But theoperating current may be essentially higher if itonly flows shortly and is then interrupted - this isthe case by means of the transmitted signal. Theintensity of a light pulse is therefore essentiallyhigher as it should be at a continuous operation.Consequently the sensivity of the receiver doesnot need to be increased unnecessarily, wherebythe influence of the disturbing light will bedecreased. The channel decoder electronic servesmainly to sense and to make a difference amongthe eight channels. For that the transmitted signalcarries further information and therefore it iscalled as carrier signal.

1.2.5.4 The coding systemThe coding system serves to assign an exactlyspecified IR light pattern to each channel, i.e. toeach device that will be remote controlled. Thispattern must be known by the transmitter andreceiver.

This IR light pattern is designed by means ofcoded numbers of the binary number system; theyare also called "addresses". Each numeral of thisbinary number can only assume the value "1" or"0" and is called as a bit (binary digit)Each load that is remote controlled gets anaddress; so a special bit sequence is assign to it.This address is coded in the infrared signal that isradiated by the transmitter. The IR receiverinstalled in the room read this encoded IR lightand only trigger a process in the following load, ifthe IR light will contain the assigned address. Inthis way, many loads can be addressedindependently on each other by one transmitter.

How is the coding in IR light managed?

A pulse width modulation with a carrier is used.Firstly a pulse with 8 oscillations of the 455 kHz IRcarrier signal is transmitted. It is composed of 8

active cycles of 1.1 µs, separated by 7 breaks of1.1 µs. The total pulse lasts 15 x 1.1 µs, as it isshown in the figure Pulse width modulation.When the next pulse of 8 carrier oscillationsfollows now in a distance of 7.59 ms, thetransmitter interprets this as a bit with the value"1". If the next pulse will already follow in adistance of 5,06 ms, the transmitter will interpretthis as a bit with the value "0", see figure Pulsewidth modulation.

7,59 ms 5,06 msBit "1" Bit "0"

16,5 µs

455 kHz

1,1µs

1,1µs

Figure: Pulse width modulation

By means of that procedure, a complete addressis transferred bit by bit from the transmitter toreceiver.While the data are transmitted each address isadded by some accompanying bits. A complete bitsequence, that belongs to an informationtransmission, is called "telegram".While pressing the key continuously telegramswith the same contents are sent out by the IRtransmitter in intervals of 132 ms.

How does a telegram look like?

A telegram is composed of 12 bit, as shown in thefigure Complete telegram.

It starts with 2 "toggle bits" T0 and T1. The togglebits change their state at each new key operation,even if the address of the new telegram haschanged.

If a telegram should be lost in a telegramsequence, e.g. a person runs through the IR beamthe IR receiver can recognise by means of thetoggle bit of the next following telegram that atransmission gap has occurred or if the transmitkey was pressed again, and the IR receiverswitches the load accordingly.

Chap.: 1.2 Page: 10

This function can however only be realised inremote control systems with pure switchingoperations. In systems with switching anddimming operation this decoding would createmalfunctions, because it is not distinguishedbetween small switching and long dimmingtelegrams. For this reason the toggle bits are notevaluated in the receiver of the remote controlsystem described here .

Four "subsystem addresses" SA3..SA0 follow.It has been defined internationally that telegramsof IR remote control with the applications of thearea "switching and dimming light" should workunder the subsystem addresses 14 or 15.For this reason the subsystem address 15 is usedin this telegrams. The number 15 is realised asthe binary sequence "1 1 0 1" (it is not identicalwith the 15 of the binary code 1111, since here aspecial code is designed).

Now 6 address bits "A5..A0" follow. They serve forthe distinction of every load.

According to the key operation of the 4 channeltransmitter, the address bit A0 and A1 are setdifferently, since this covers 4 differentpossibilities. The key operation of a 8 channeltransmitter changes additionally the address bitA2, since 8 different addresses are required. Bymeans of the 8fold group switch of the 64 channelhandheld transmitter the address bits A3 to A5can be set differently whose further content isdetermined by the keys 1 to 8. In normal use thegroup switch is set on position "A".

While a bit with the information "1" needs a longertransmission time than a bit with the information"0", the telegram length is variable.Theoretically the telegrams can be long from 12xbit "0" (5.06 ms) = approx. 60 ms up to 12x bit "1"(7.59 ms) = approx. 90 ms . If a transmit key ispressed continuously, telegrams are always sent,that have a constant distance of tw = 132 ms, i.e.the transmission duration is always completed bya break of 132 ms.

Toggle-Bit Subsystem-address bit Address bit

T T SA SA SA SA A A A A A A T3 32 21 10 045

= 132 mst W

1 0 1

Figure: Complete telegram

Resistance against disturbances:

If a signal is transmitted at the limit of the range,the receiver can get telegrams with gaps. If bitsare missing in the telegram or also only oneoscillation of the 455 kHz of a pulse is missing,the telegram is not decoded.

The IR receiver filters frequencies under andabove the 455 kHz carrier frequency using a bandpass. This is the reason they are not decoded.

Here the advantage of this remote control systemis visible, because the mentioned carrierfrequency is not used in other light applications.The transmission range of traditional remotecontrols which are operating with 20 to 50 kHz, isessentially reduced by the light of fluorescentlamps. That is also the range of fluorescent lampsoperating with electronic ballasts.

If IR light parts with 455 kHz from another source(for example other remote control system) shouldinterfere a telegram, it is not switchedunintentionally because telegrams containingmore pulses as needed for the transmission, shallnot be decoded.

We can say as a result of this, that the mentionedprocedure of a telegram transmission is extremelyresistant against disturbances.

Chap.: 1.3 Page: 1

1.3 Electronic switches and push buttons

1.3.1 Switches1.3.1.1 Push-relay switchThe push-relay switch serves to switch-on and offmanually electrical loads and has with it theknown functions of traditional light switches.Nevertheless in contrast it owns an importantadditional feature, so it finds applications that arenot suitable for mechanical switches.

An electronic memory in the push-relay switch, aso-called flip flop, saves the respective switchstate (further information in chap. 1.3.1.2 IR-switches). The flip flop can only save the switchstate "On" or "Off", if it is continuously suppliedwith the operating voltage, which is for this devicenot generated from a battery but from the mains .No operating voltage will exist consequently, if themains fails. In that case the flip flop loses itsmemory and falls back into the "Off" switchingposition, in which it will stay after the mainsvoltage return - that is also the flip flop voltagereturn. Then a new manual operation is necessaryto switch-on the device . In case of short mainsfailures with a duration less than 0.2 sec theswitch state "On" remains however , because inthis time the capacitor of the operating voltage issufficiently supplied with voltage. The current"On"-switching position is deleted certainly aftermore than 2 seconds .

This feature (which by the way is alsoimplemented in the touch-dimmer and therelevant devices of the IR-system) is used forcentral controls to save energy: In example inoffice rooms, it very often seen that the lighting isnot switched off at sufficient daylight. In this casesit is possible to prevent the light "burning"unnecessarily by means of central switching-offthe mains for a short time. Push-relay switchesmay be used for this purpose.If the current natural brightness in a room is notsufficient, the light can be switched-onimmediately after the short mains interruption.

Switching-off the mains can be performedrepeatedly within the day and it can be controlledautomatically by means of clock switches and anoutdoor brightness sensor. It is our experiencethat considerable energy costs can be saved dueto this process.

1.3.1.2 IR switchesIf a remote control is installed to controlcomfortably the lighting, IR-dimmers are normallyused, since they can both switching as well asdimming. The maximal power rating is limited to500W due to the use of semiconductorcomponents as switches in IR-dimmer and due tothe heat generation of them in the devices.Moreover the correct dimmer has to be selectedto the corresponding kind of lamp. In somesituations, where the remote control is the mainaspect, the brightness control is cancelled. In thiscases the mentioned disadvantages of the IR-dimmer no longer applies by using the IR-switches.

Following advantages are resulting without thedimming function:

Replacing the triac used in dimmers, amechanical contact takes the function of the loadswitch. Thereby no radio frequency interferencesare generated, so no suppression components arenecessary. Missing the triac and the suppressingchoke, only low heat is created in the IR-switchand that was the reason of the maximum powerlimitation.

Because IR-switches do not contain RFIsuppression components, a minimum load as wellas the usual basic load for the control offluorescent lamps is not required. Therefore loadswithin the range of 0 - 1000W can be switched.

By means of the figure Principle circuit of an IR-switch the function of the IR-switch is explained.The device needs the connection of the neutralconductor, otherwise the electronic of the IR-switch will not be supplied with voltage, if theswitch S is closed. The load switch S is a part ofthe relay Re, which is attracted by the switchingtransistor T1.

Chap.: 1.3 Page: 2

to furtherextensionunits

L

N

Si

La

N

D1

R1

S Re

T1 Z C1

R3

R4R5

T2

R2

KK

1

1

U

FF-IC

IR-recei.B

De-bouncelogic

A E

Figure: Principle circuit of an IR-switch

The resistor R1 limits the energizing current of therelay onto a maximum allowed value. The diodeD1 allows solely a negative energizing current,since T1 is only able to switch that. By means ofsuitable measures the fall-out delay time of therelay is increased, so that the switching contact isalso closed at the positive mains half wave (10ms), altough no energizing current is flowing.

The control voltage of T1 for holding thecorresponding switching state is created by thecontrol electronic. It essentially exists of anintegrated circuit with a flip flop function. Thefundamental operation of a flip flop is shown in thefollowing figure.

t

t

FF

AU

UE

UE AU

BU

Figure: Operation of a flip flop

In this case the operating voltage is negative andso the input and output voltages appear with therelevant polarity.

The typical behaviour of a flip flop is that theoutput voltage UA only changes if the inputvoltage UE changes with the slope rising from OVto -UB, a falling slope does affect the output.

UA falls back to it initial state, when a secondinput voltage step appears with a rising slope. Inthis way, the flip flop takes over the storage ofswitching position. Since it can take two stablestates, it is also called "bistable multivibrator".

A debounce logic is connected in series to the flipflop , so that a bouncing of the key K in thereceiver does not lead to a multiple setting. Itfilters the very fast bouncing pulses of the key andallows only one switch procedure per keystroke.

The current limiting resistor R1, the Zener diodeZ, the charging capacitor C1 and the diode D1serve for the power supply of the control circuit.

The entire circuit is built in a flush mountingdevice, which is completed by attaching the IR-receiver onto the IR-switch. Switching commandsac can either be set by the remote control or beset by manually pressing the key or be set by anexternal push button.

Chap.: 1.3 Page: 3

1.3.1.3 IR recessed switchIn principle the IR-recessed switch contains thesame function as the IR-switch, described inchapter 1.3.1.2. But it is possible to use it in theceiling, as a special housing variant was designed.

The IR-receiving diodes are mounted in a smallmushroom-shaped receiver housing, which isvisible as the sole component in the ceiling afterthe installation. Thus, the IR radiation can beevaluated from all directions, 3 receiving diodesare assembled in an angle of 120°. Since eachreceiving diode has also a receiving angle of120°, the reception of the radiation from 360°around is guaranteed. The filtering, decoding andcontrol of the input telegram is set by the pre-amplifier IC built in the receiving housing, asdescribed in chapter 1.7.3, see figure Principlecircuit of an IR recessed switch.

The receiving housing is designed as a key, thatswitches the lamp load directly. In case of anemergency (for example empty batteries in thetransmitter device) the load is also able to beswitched.

IR-receiver and power unit are connected by afour-core wire:

− voltage supply of the receiver, approx. 5V(brown core)

− ground, 0V (white core)− information signal of the pre-amplifier (green

core)− signal of the emergency key (yellow core)

As in 1.7.3 mentioned, the decoder in the powerunit evaluates the input telegram and activatesthe decoder output corresponding to the telegram.Since the device was designed for the use withthe 4channel IR-wall transmitter (chapter 1.7.2),this Recessed receiver is operating with 4channels, i.e. the decoder has 4 outputs, whichwill be set depending on the telegram.The channel switch S1 is adjusted during theinstallation, see figure Principle circuit of an IR-recessed switch. The corresponding channel andtransmit key respectively will then be evaluated,i.e. the relevant decoder output will be switched tothe following flip flop. The flip flop stores theswitching state of the decoder output and gives itdurably to the "driver stage with relay" (see in thesame figure). By means of its contactat the output terminal "â" the relay switches thepower supply of the connected load according tothe state of the flip flop.

The device operates in toggle mode i.e. each keystroke will set the flip flop into its reverse stateand the load can be switched on and offalternately.As the IR-receiver, the IR- recessed switch reactsalso on telegrams with the subsystem address 15and address 1 to 4, only the address bit A0 and A1are variable.

12

3

4

S1

Receiving diodes120° angle

Pre- amplifier

IC

Emergencykey

IR-receiver Power unit

Voltage supply

Decoder

(Processor IC)

1 MHzOszillator

Flipflop

Driverstagewith relay

LN

brownwhite

green

yellow

approx.5 V

Channelswitch

Figure: Principle circuit of an IR-recessed switch.

Chap.: 1.3 Page: 4

So the IR-recessed switch can operated by bothwith the wall transmitter as well as with the4channel and 8channel handheld transmitter. Ifthe 8 channel handheld transmitter is used, it mustbe guaranteed, that the 8fold group switch of thetransmitter is set to position "A".

Information:

IR-recessed switches with other addresses ,e.g.B,C,D are offered on inquiry.

The wire between the IR-receiver and the powerunit is allowed to be lengthened to max. 10m.As the wire signals are on mains potential, youhave to follow the creepage distances andclearances according to DIN VDE 0100.The lengthened wire shall not be installed inparallel to mains wires or load wires, a distance ofsome centimetres is required.The wire type LIYY 4 x 0.14mm is mounted by themanufacturer and is also recommended to thelengthening.

1.3.2 Push buttons1.3.2.1 IR-push button with single pulseIn bigger rooms it is very often useful to install aso-called latching relay circuit instead of a 2-wayor 4-way circuit. In this installations, push buttonsworking as a latching relays are installed at theoperating places. This combination has theadvantage, that only the latching relay has toswitch the load current, while the push buttonshave to be designed for the power which isnecessary to trigger the latching relay. Latchingrelays are suitable in bigger lighting installations,because they are designed up to nominal currentsof 63 A according to type. Finally, latching currentcircuit are well used, since it is an easierinstallation work. To use the advantages of aremote controli n these cases , an IR-push buttonmust only replace a mechanical push button. TheIR-push button should be installed preferablynearby a socket outlet, as the connection of the

neutral wire is required for the voltage supply inthe IR-push button.

The IR-push button is only suitable for a latchingrelays with an operating voltage of 230 V. (As youknow there are also latching relays with lowvoltage, e.g. 8,24,42 Volt)The IR-push button is not suitable for thisapplications, because the latching relay ( alsocalled step relay or pulse relay ) stores itself theswitching state. It requires only a short pulse tochange the position - similar to the flip flop in theIR-switch. Therefore no switches are used asoperation unit in latching relay circuits, but pushbuttons.

The IR-push button is composed of an electronicpulse generator ( flush mounting device) and theattachable IR-transmitter, which is known from theIR-push dimmer and IR-switch.

By means of the figure IR-push button with singlepulse we explain the function of the unit. Thepulse generator is designed to a maximal powerrating of 40VA. However it is absolutely sufficientto trigger the latching relay SSR. Therefore nomechanical contact is used as a "load switch", buta small power triac. That one requires a verysmall gate current, so the total voltage supply ofthe control electronic may be designed with verysmall means.

The triac becomes conductive, as soon as it getsa control voltage from the monoflop (MF) IC and itwill hold the state until the control voltage fallsback to its initial state and the following sine zerocrossing of the mains will switch the triac off.

With it, the duration of the IR-push button outputsignal is independent of the duration of the keystroke. The duration is only determined by thetime constant in the monoflop-IC as well as by thetime which is running from the start of firing thetriac to the end of the current mains half wave.

Chap.: 1.3 Page: 5

to furthermechanical orIR push buttons

LN

SSR

Dr

D1 R1

C1

T

Si

Z C2

Ct

Rt

Pulse generator

MF-IC

K

1

IR-recei.

N

Debouncelogic

1UB K

Figure: Principle circuit of an IR-push button with single pulse

The fundamental operation of a monoflop isshown in the following figure:

t

t

MF-IC

AU

UE

UE AU

BU

ττ τ

Figure: Operation of a monoflop

The output generates pulses of always samelength independent on the length of the inputsignal, where the start of an output pulse iscoincided with the end of the input signal. Theoutput only persists shortly in the new switchingposition and then changes automatically back toits stable state. Because of that the monoflop isalso called monostable multivibrator.

The duration of the output pulse is designed bythe corresponding calculation of timing elementRt, Ct (Figure Principle circuit of an IR push buttonwith single pulse).Its value is approx. 60 ms and is in each casesufficient, so that the latching relay is sure tochange over. By means of the mentionedswitching mode only very less radio interferencesare created. The components choke Dr andcapacitor C1 serve mainly to protect the triacagainst mains voltage peaks as to suppress radiointerferences. The rectifier diode D1, the chargingcurrent limiting resistor R1, the Zener diode 1 andthe charging capacitor C2 serve for the voltagesupply of the triac.

So the bouncing of the attached key will not causea multiple triggering of the monoflop IC, adebounce logic is connected in series, which filtersthese debounce pulses

External mechanical push buttons may be notconnected to terminal 1, but in parallel to the IR-push button. Through it, the retrofitting using thisdevice is simple. It is allowed to connect up to 15push button in parallel, but you have to notice,that the neutral conductor has to be connected toevery device.

Chap.: 1.3 Page: 6

1.3.2.2 IR push button with permanent pulseThe IR-push button with permanent pulse is usedas remote extension unit for power controller,which have an extension input "1".Power controllers with extension inputs are thefollowing devices:

• Push button relay switch, Chap. 1.3.1.1• IR-switch, Chap. 1.3.1.2• IR-push button with single pulse Chap. 1.3.2.1• Touch dimmer for

incandescent lamps Chap. 1.4.2.1• LV touch dimmer Chap. 1.4.2.2• IR-touch dimmer Chap. 1.4.3.1• IR-LV touch dimmer Chap. 1.4.3.2• TRONIC- touch dimmer Chap. 1.5.2.1• TRONIC recessed dimmer Chap. 1.5.2.2• IR-TRONIC- touch dimmer Chap. 1.2.3.1

The output of the IR-push button with permanentpulse closes only for the time the attached key oran IR-transmit key is pushed, as shown in figureSwitching operation of an IR push button withpermanent pulse. Short delays of the switchingtime caused by the IR telegram transmission areinsignificant .

By means of the IR-push button with permanentpulse the mains voltage is applied to theextension input "1" of the power controller for theduration of the push button operation. Shortpulses at the extension input (approx.60-400 ms)are identified by the power controller asOn/Off commands, as longer pulses (> 400ms)are identified as dimming commands, if thepower controller is not only designed to switch.

Also other loads, which may be switched only forthe duration of the push button operation, forexample an acoustic signal generator, can becontrolled by the IR-push button with permanentpulse. However the requirement is that the

connected maximum power will not be exceeded.Otherwise a relay has to be connected.

The construction of the IR-push button withpermanent pulse complies with the IR-pushbutton with single pulse, as described in chapter1.3.2.1. The only difference is that the monoflop-IC with the circuit Rt, Ct is replaced by a non-time dependent amplifier stage, to switch thetriac only for the duration push button operation.

1.3.2.3 IR extension push button 4fold EbThe IR-extension push button 4fold Eb is a4channel push button with permanent pulse in ahousing that is most suitable for ceiling mounting.

The function of the four outputs independentcontrollable complies with the function of thementioned IR-push button with permanent pulse(flush mounting). They are closed only for theduration of push button operation, as shown inthe figure Switching operation of an IR pushbutton with permanent pulse. They serve also forthe control of all dimmers, switches and pushbuttons, which possess an extension input "1".

Because of the different housings of these powercontrollers, the TRONIC recessed dimmer issuitable for the common operation with an IR-extension push button fold Be in one falseceiling. However, flush mounting devices can beinstalled in a housing and put into the falseceiling. The attached short-stroke key of the flushmounting devices is not needed. Such anoperation of the push relay switch has noproblems, but using flush mounting devices themaximum connected power has to be reducedbecause of the smaller heat dissipation (seedimmer installation guidelines)

Output signalpush button

Push button operation

load on

load off

key pressedkey released

Figure: Switching operation of an IR push button with permanent pulse

Chap.: 1.3 Page: 7

The output contacts of the IR-extension pushbutton 4fold Eb are built as potential-isolatedcontacts. It is possible with it, to distribute thecontrolled load circuits on any phases. In oneload circuit the devices should always operate onthe same phase, because potential difference of400 V will cause the damage of the devices. Thecontrol of several dimmers by one output is notallowed, because in the time range from theswitching command to the dimming command,the dimmers may interpret the commandsdifferently. To increase the power, the powerextensions must be installed.

Further extension units can be connected inparallel to the control wires of the single dimmeror switches (for example flush mounting pushbutton or extension unit type A), which will allowan additional manual operation of thecorresponding load.

Construction of the device:The IR receiving module, known from the IR-recessed switch (Chap.1.3.1.3), is also used inthis IR-extension push button Eb.The following figure with the principle circuitshows clearly the differences of the decoder partof both devices: One of the address groups A toH is set by the address group select switch andthe decoder would evaluate these correspondingtelegrams. As described in chapter 1.2.5.4, thetelegrams with different address group aredifferent have different values in the address bitA3 to A5.

The decoder sets it's 8 outputs with the evaluatedsignal of all 8 channels of an address group. Bymeans of the channel select switch it is chosenwhether channel 1-4 or channel 5-8 is transferredby the multiplexing element to the 4 channeldriver stage with relay. In contrast to the IR-recessed switch the IR-extension push buttondoes not contain any memory components. Therelay of the driving stage is only switching thecorresponding output for the time currenttelegrams are existing.

The emergency key that is integrated in the IRreceiving module offers the possibility to switchmanually the decoder output of channel 1/15, iffor example the battery fails. So the lighting thatis connected to this output, can be set to desiredstate.

By means of the mentioned possibilities ofselecting at the device, all 64 possible channelsof the handheld transmitter with 8fold groupswitch can be used in the application.

If the devices is controlled by a 4fold IR-handheld transmitter or a 4fold IR-walltransmitter the IR-extension push button Eb is toset on address group "a" and channel "1-4".

The information about wire lengthening that ismentioned in chap. 1.3.1.3 is also applicable tothe IR-extension push button.

receiving diodes120° angle

pre-amplifier

IC

emergency key

IR receiver power unit

voltage supply

decoder(processor IC)

1 M H zoscillator

LN

brownwhite

green

yellow

approx..5 V

A B C D E F G H

8

7

6

5

4

2

3

1group

5-8 1-4channel select switch

group select switch

multiplexerdriver stage withrelay

Chan.1/5

Chan.4/8

Chan.3/7

Chan.2/6

chan

nel

pote

ntia

l iso

late

d ou

tput

s

Figure: Principle circuit of the IR extension push button 4fold Eb

Chap.: 1.4 Page: 1

1.4 Phase-cut-on control dimmer1.4.1 Dimmers with rotary or push buttonIn the simplest case a dimmer circuit is composedof the four components: Triac T, diac Di,potentiometer R and capacitor C2.

T Di

C1

C2

D

R

NL1

L

UT

UL

Figure: Simplest dimmer circuit

The components D and C1 are required tosuppress RFI (RFI = radio frequencyinterferences) additionally. The diac is an assistingcomponent to fire the triac and can be seen as atriac without a gate terminal with a breakovervoltage of only approx. 30...40V. (Looking ontothe equivalent circuit in figure Triac functionimitation of chap. 1.2.1, the gate winding ismissing on the relay. The relay switches just at avoltage of 30..40 V by means of R s).

As long as the triac T is blocking, a small currentis flowing through the load L and the RFIsuppression capacitor C1. A current withapproximately the same value is flowing throughR and C2. No voltage drop appears at theinductance L. The full mains voltage is applied tothe dimmer terminals ↑ and ↓ (triac voltage UT inthe figure Voltage curves at dimming a). The diacDi is also blocked. The current through thepotentiometer R is charging the capacitor C2(figure Voltage curves at dimming b). If the firingvoltage Uz of the diac is reached, the capacitor C2is suddenly discharged with a current through thediac and the triac gate. The triac switches on bymeans of that firing pulse, so that the voltage U zfalls onto a residual voltage (voltage drop at Dand T) and the full mains voltage is applied to theload L(figure Voltage curves at dimming c).The load is not applied to the complete mains halfwave (10 ms at 50 Hz), but only for a time that is

reduced by the firing delay time t Z. Because ofthat the power in the load is reducedcorresponding to tZ (lamp is shining less brightly,motor is tuning less slowly). The triac blocks againat the end of the mains half wave (see chapter"Diodes and triacs") and the just describedprocess starts from the beginning by means ofcharging C2 up to the diac firing voltage.Because the charging procedure of C2 can bedelayed by R or increased, tZ can be set as youlike and with that the power can be changed whenrequired. If the RC path is interrupted, the triac willfire no more, the load L stays switched-off.

t

a

UT

t

b

UC2

UZ

t

c

UL

10 mszt

Figure: Voltage curves at dimming

Nevertheless a current of about 10...15 mA ispermanently flowing through the load (currentthrough C1 and reverse current through T). Ifworking at the load current circuit of such devices,which are not disconnected from the mains by amechanical switch, one have to be carefully! Aslong as the load is connected, only a small voltageis applied to L, as it will be shown in the following:

For example L may be a lamp with a coldresistance of 100 Ω and the switched-off dimmerhas a "leakage current" of 10 mA, then only 100 Ωx 0,01 A = 1 Volt is applied to the load terminals.But is the lamp is broken or is unscrewed from thelamp holder, no current will flow through thedimmer, and no voltage drop will occur by it. Sothe full phase voltage is connected to the loadterminals and to the lamp holder respectively!.

Chap.: 1.4 Page: 2

1.4.1.1 Dimmers for incandescent lampsAdditionally to the basic circuit shown in figureSimplest dimmer circuit, dimmers, reallyconstructed, are normally completed with a fuseSi, a switch S and a trimmer resistor Tr as sown inthe following picture

T Di

C1

C2

DR

NL1

L

Si

S

Tr

Figure: Extended dimmer circuit

The switch is very often a push-switch or a turn-switch and is fixed mechanically to thepotentiometer. If the dimmer is switched-off, theload is really disconnected galvanically by theopened switch S ("leakage current" is zero). Thefuse serves to protect the triac (see chapterFuses). The trimmer resistor is once adjusted on avalue that one can see the lamp shining also on ahigher resistor value R (dark position)and the user is remembered to switch-off thedimmer by the switch S and not by an extremedark position.

As seen in figure Extended dimmer circuit, it is allthe same to the dimmer, "in which way" it isconnected (phase to ↑ or load to ↓ or reverse).Connecting the dimmer as shown in the figure,you only have to note, that the phase voltage isalways applied to the fuse, even if the switch S isopened. So in accordance to that you have to becarefully, if the fuse is replaced.

For simplicity in the following the completeelectronic part of a dimmer is presented as avariable resistor, but one should always keep inmind, that in reality a dimmer is a switch operatingwith 100 Hz. It is possible to save power only bymeans of these switches:

Only for the time the triac is switched-on, power isconsumed!

If the lamp is shining with only half the power,then half the power is taken from the mains. If thepower is controlled by connecting a resistor inseries, the higher part of the "saved" power of thelamp is lost in the resistor as heat!

The figure Extended dimmer circuit is reduced tothe circuit shown in figure Switching circuitDimmer. It is presented in a simplified form.

S

1

2

Figure: Switching circuit Dimmer

The switch S is very often constructed as a 2-wayswitch and so the dimmer can be used inconventional 2-way and 4-way circuits.

Electrically the dimmer is a normal 2-way switch,that has an electronic variable resistor at itscommon terminal (terminal P, figure Dimmer in 4-way circuit). It is installed like a mechanical 2-wayswitch in a 2-way or 4-way circuit. Using dimmersfor incandescent lamps, in a 2-way or 4-waycircuit it does not matter, that the dimmer replacesthe 2-way switch on the load side or on the phaseside.

N

Load side

Dimmer

PL1

Phase side

Intermediateswitch

2-way switch

Figure: Dimmer in 4-way circuit

A special form of the dimmer for incandescentlamp is the dimmer with a rotary switch. It is acircuit according to the figure Simplest dimmercircuit. The potentiometer construction is designedin a way, that the wiper can be moved out of theresistive path, so that the current path R - C2 iscompletely interrupted.With it no triac firing is resulting, so the load L isswitched-off.

Chap.: 1.4 Page: 3

1.4.1.2 LV-dimmer for conventional transformers

In the lighting installations lamps of differentsupply voltages are used. Transformers serve toadapt them to the mains voltage. If a brightnesscontrol shall be is planned, additionally a dimmermust be connected in series. In principle thedimmer could be inserted into the primary orsecondary wire of the transformer. Technicallythe series circuit of the dimmer with the primaryside is a success.

L

NMains 230 V

Trans-former

LV-lampLV halogen dimmer

Figure: Series circuit of dimmer - transformer

There are many causes for it. On the secondaryside in halogen lamps higher currents are flowingthan on the primary side. That leads to a highcurrent and heat stress of the electronic switch inthe dimmer.It is more favourable, supposed it is the samepower, to switch a high voltage at low current.

Moreover the standpoint can not be defended,that the transformer is operating if the dimmer isswitched-off. So that in general a switch on thesecondary side of the transformer is forbidden.

Controlling the light of LV-lamps withconventional transformers connected in series, ingeneral only special designed LV-halogen-dimmer are suited. These dimmers are workingwith the phase-cut-on principle, contain a specialnetwork (i.e. Rs and Cs in the figure Circuit ofLV-halogen-dimmer) and are well calculated forthis purpose.

Usually used dimmers for incandescent lampsare only designed for resistive loads. In actualpractice it is found, that an operation of thedimmer connected to the transformer can lead toradio frequency interferences or even damages.It can occur, i.e.:− flickering in some dimmer positions− blowing the fuses, especially at switching-on− breaking of the transformer.

The difficulties at dimming result from theinductive behaviour of the transformer. We willrapidly go into it.

Behaviour of transformers

The inductances of a transformer create reactivecurrents, i.e. a phase shift appears betweencurrent and voltage. The current is lagging thevoltage. That causes firing problems in thedimmer for incandescent lamps, because thetriac holding current is not able to follow at thefiring point. The firing and switching-off are notunambiguously defined. That results in flickeringand acoustic noises.

If unsymetries will appear due to the firingproblems, direct current parts will flow throughthe transformer in addition. So a transformer canbe overheated and then it will break (reason:magnetic saturation - high self-heating)

As LV-lamps have a special switch-on feature. Inthe lamps a switch-on current is flowing for atime of 300 ms (15 mains voltage periods), whichcan reach 10 times that of the rated current.Incandescent lamps have a switch-on duration ofapprox. 40 ms (2 mains periods), the switch-oncurrent reaches 10 times that of the ratedcurrent. According to the construction or type ofconnected transformer varying high switch-oncurrents will appear.Transformers with a high efficiency (less straymagnetic field), e.g. toroidal core transformers,can create extreme high currents. But the currentrush of transformers with more losses, e.g. ironcore transformers with E/I or M cut, is reducedconsiderably. Because of these features sometoroidal core transformers are not suited to bedimmed. The current rush is so high, that eachfuse will trip. Even the 16 A - fuse of the houseconnection will be blown.

The switch-on behaviour causes that slow-blowfuses are used in dimmers of LV-lamps.

To define the requirements of this dimmer it isappropriate to study the transformer concerning− open-circuit− rated current− short-circuit

An open-circuit is occurring if all lamps are blownor the secondary connection is interrupted. Thatcan be a danger to the dimmer becauseresonances resulting from voltage peaks up to1000 V can damage the triac.

Chap.: 1.4 Page: 4

In case of the rated current the definition isunambiguously, so the dimmer is defined for thiscase. As mentioned before, the switch-onbehaviour causes problems.

We have to take into account also the short-circuit because the LV-dimmer can also beinstalled for dimming incandescent lamps witch230V. If these lamps burn through, a sparkappears for a short time, which is practically ashort-circuit. To protect the dimmer against suchhigh short-circuit currents, fuses are inserted.

Explaining the transformer behaviour:

A clear description is possible by means of theequivalent circuit of the transformer.

M

L1 L2i i2*

u2*u1 Ra*

C Su2

u Dimmer

Transformer

Figure: Equivalent circuit of a transformer

The equivalent circuit presents roughly atransformer and a dimmer. It is the meaning:

L1,2 = leakage inductancesM = mutual inductanceRa* = lamp resistance referred to the

primary sidei2*, u2* = output current/voltages referred to

the primary sideC = capacity of the dimmerS = triac as a switch.

Now we will regard the 3 cases open-circuit,rated load, and short-circuit (switch-onbehaviour).

Open-circuit:

Supposing there is no Ra* (Ra* = infinite), nocurrent i2* is flowing. If the switch S is open, theseries circuit of L1, M and C is effective. Theinductances of the transformer and the capacityof the dimmer form a series resonant circuit.Because almost no attenuation will happen (theresistances of the wires are very small),

resonance step-ups can appear in thetransformer and in the dimmer, which fault-fire ordestroy the triac in the dimmer.

Rated load:

The resistance Ra* has a finite value. In thetransformer the series circuit of L1 and L2 withRa* in parallel to M is effective.A definite phase angle is resulting between i1and u1, as Ra* is constant. The transformer canbe operated in a definite load range. If Ra*varies, the phase angle changes also.

Short-circuit:

That means Ra*= 0, thinking Ra* is jumpered. L1is in series with the parallel circuit of M and L2.Because M is 100 times higher than L2, only L2is effective in the parallel circuit. The short-circuitcurrent is only limited by the leakage inductancesL1 and L2. Toroidal core transformers have a lowstray magnetic field. So their power-factor is veryconvenient, but the short-circuit current canreach 20 times the rating current. Only the notdrawn winding resistances are effective on thelimitation.

The short-circuit mechanism is also effective atthe switching-on. The current is mainlydetermined by the low cold resistance of thelamp. The values are 10 times the rated current.Dimmer fuses will be blown, while they can notdistinguish between a short-circuit and aswitching-on current. A correct calculation of afuse value is not possible. That is the reasonbecause toroidal core transformers with a lowstray magnetic field are not suited to controllighting. More and more transformermanufactures offer dimmable toroidal coretransformers, in which the switching-on current islimited by a special construction. Transformerwith E-,I-, or M-cut contain such a high straymagnetic field, that these problems do notappear.

Construction of the dimmer

The requirements of the dimmer result from thebehaviour of the Lamps and of the transformer.The diverse requirement lead to a design of adimmer with following features:

Chap.: 1.4 Page: 5

− universal suitable, largely independent fromthe type of transformer

− wide load range (20 ... 500 W)− faultless function in the completely allowed

load range of the transformer− no destruction of the dimmer or transformer in

the case of open-circuit− a fuse protects the dimmer and transformer

against short-circuit− the high switch-on current does not blow the

fuse.

These features are added by the positivefeatures of the dimmer for incandescent lamps.

− low acoustic noise− radio frequency interference suppressed

Technical realisation:

In contrast to the dimmer for incandescent lampsthere are listed 2 special features.At first the phase shift being not constant musthave no influence onto the dimm process. Forthat circuit measures are necessary.

Secondly the switch-on current may not blow thefuse. So slow-blow fuses are fused.

Circuit measures:

The following figure shows the principle of a LV-halogen lamp-dimmer.

L

NMains 230 V

i

C

B

Zi

i

Figure: Principle of the LV-halogen lamp-dimmer

If we remove the current source ic and replacethe transformer by a 230V-lamp, so the dimmerfor incandescent lamps is created. We assume,that it is known how a dimmer for incandescentlamps operates.

Rapidly repeated: A change of brightnesshappens by the control of the supplied electrical

energy. The dimmer serves as an electronicswitch, which interrupts the current and electricalenergy within each sine half wave a definite timeduration. By means of the inertia of the filamentand of our eyes we recognise only integrally thechange of brightness. The time duration isdefined as phase angle and we speak fromphase-cut-on.

The triac is used as a switching component: Thisone possesses special features:

− The switching-on is caused by means of thefiring current, which is supplied to the gate-control input. A conductive state exists only, ifa minimum current (the latch current) flowsthrough the triac.

− The switching-off is not caused by means ofthe control circuit. Only if a definite currentvalue (the holding current) is fallen below thetriac blocks itself.

The firing current is generated from the mainsvoltage, the firing time is selected by a timecircuit (in figure Circuit of the LV-halogen lamp-dimmer: Rv, P, C)

Tr

iT

L

N

L1

iC LRV

CS

RS

C1

RH

Di

Si

C

P

Figure: Circuit of a LV-halogen lamp-dimmer

As long as no phase shift appears between thetriac current (load current) and the mains voltage(and with it the firing current, a faultlessswitching-on is guaranteed. The dimmerswitches-off without any problems at mains zerocrossing, because it is the identically with thecurrent zero crossing.

Chap.: 1.4 Page: 6

By means of a phase shift between current andvoltage he triac switches at indefinite timeperiods, the light flickers, dimmer andtransformer are humming. The phase shift cannot be prevented, if a transformer is connected.The only way is to compensate the effects of thelagging current.

For that a current source ic is inserted in thefigure Principle of LV- halogen lamp-dimmer,which is time-controlled. At the correct time itsupplies the current to switch-on and leads thelagging current until the triac is switched-off. Thefigure: Circuit of a LV-halogen lamp-dimmershows a realized circuit of a LV-dimmer withrotary potentiometer and push-change switch.The function of the current source iz isguaranteed by means of the components Rv, P,C, Di, RH. L and C1 serves for radio frequencyinterference suppression. Cs and Rs realize thedesired current source function ic.

Fuses:

Fuses should protect the dimmer, especially thetriac, against too high currents. It is crucial, thatthe supplied energy and not the current damagesthe components. This is defined as current-time-behaviour (I²t value). Also for fuses this value isthe main factor.

t/s

102

103

101

100

10-1

10-2

10-3

1 1,5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 I/IN

quick-actingmedium slowslow-blowfuse

FMTT

Figure: Fuse characteristics

Fuses trip at different times although the samecurrent is flowing. because of that fuses aremarked as described below, e.g. T 2/ 250D

That means:T = slow-blow fuse2 = 2 A rated current250 = 250 V voltageD = breaking capacity

Solely the marking of the permissible currentvalue is not sufficient. In every case the fuse hasto trip faster than the triac, the product I²t has tobe smaller. On the other hand the fuse shouldnot trip at switching-on. As using LV-halogenlamps instead of incandescent lamps the switch-on duration is 7.5 times (300 ms:40 ms) longer,slow-blow fuses have to be planned at equallyhigh current. The fuses are exactly calculated tothe used triac type and so only fuses with thesame values are allowed to be replaced.

Instructions for use:

1. Not all transformer can be dimmed, toroidalcore transformers often create problems.Flickering, humming and fuse damagescaused by high switch-on currents will occur.Please ask in doubtful cases the dimmer ortransformer manufacturer which can confirmthe ability for dimming.

2. In each cases the dimmer has to beconnected in series with the 230 V - primarywinding of the transformer.

3. A switching-off of the load on the secondaryside should be avoided.

4. Please note the permissible minimum andmaximum load. In doubtful cases you have tomeasure the primary current of thetransformer.

5. Only use the permitted fuse, if replacing thefuse.

6. The exact tuning of dimmer and load ispossible at rated load.

Chap.: 1.4 Page: 7

1.4.1.3 Dimmer for fluorescent lampsBasically a fluorescent lamp is tube filled with anelectrically non-conductive gas and with twoelectrodes isolated from each other. If a high andsufficient voltage is applied to the electrodes, thegas is ionized (the electrically neutral moleculesare separated into positive ions and negativeelectrons. The result is that all negative chargecarrier (electrons) will be collected at the positiveelectrode and the positive ones (ions) at thenegative electrode. An electric current will notoccur, as no electrons are additionally supplied.Just until the electrodes are heated up to red heat,electrons can escape from the filament (electrodeand thermal emission). These electrons -"supplied" from the heated electrons - are alwaysattracted by the positive electrode, so they runthrough the incandescent lamp and allow anelectric current through the lamp. The ions, whichare heavier in comparison, hit the negativeelectrode and heat it furthermore to red heat. Sothe conductivity of the lamp survives if theprocedure once has started.

The initial heating (Figure Fluorescent lampcircuit) is normally supported by a starter(bimetallic switch filled with inert gas): If it isclosed, the two filaments are connected in seriesand current is flowing, which is limited by theballast V (choke). So the filaments will reach asufficient temperature. The voltage across thelamp is practically zero and a start (gas ionization)can not appear.

Netzspannung

Starter

V

Figure: Fluorescent lamp circuit

If the starter opens, the induced voltage of theballast is added to the mains voltage, so that asufficiently high voltage able to start is stayingacross the electrodes. The gas becomesconductive and a current flows through the lamp.Then the voltage across the lamp falls to the so-called "arc drop" (depending from the tube lengthapprox. 50...150 V). This arc drop lays below theignition voltage of the gas in the starter. So that itwill stay opened.

If the ballast is connected in only one lamp wire asshown in figure Fluorescent lamp circuit we arespeaking about unsymmetrical ballast, which

have only one winding, consequently twoterminals.

In the following figure the connection of asymmetrical ballast is shown, which has twowindings and which are installed in the two lampwires.

Mains voltage

V

Figure: Fluorescent lamp with symmetrical ballast

Using symmetrical ballast the requiredsuppression according to radio frequencysuppression degree N can be achieved moreeasily.

The current through the lamp is limited by theballast. The filaments in the lamps are in suchway designed that they keep a sufficienttemperature at rated current to hold the currentflow. If the current is decreased by any externalinfluences (less current = fewer ions = smallerelectrode temperature = current interruption), sothe temperature of the electrodes is not sufficientfor thermal emission. The current is interrupted,the lamp turns off. A control of the brightness inthis standard circuit is consequently not possible,because if falling below the operating ratedcurrent the filament will become to cold. Tocontrol brightness it is then necessary to createthe electrode temperature independently from theoperating current.

Mains voltage

V

I

2

3

1 II

Figure: Additional heating of a fluorescent lamp

Chap.: 1.4 Page: 8

According to the above figure it is realized that thefilaments are connected to voltage sources(illustrated as a battery), which only serve to holdthe filaments on a sufficient temperature. As theheating currents I1 and I2 are totally independent ofthe lamp current I3, the electrodes have even thena sufficient temperature, if the current I 3 iscontrolled up to zero.

This additional heating is an important prerequisiteto control the brightness of fluorescent lamps. It isgenerally required, regardless of the currentlyavailable, different lamp types, to control a widerange of brightness and to guarantee a faultlessignition behaviour even at the lowest brightnessvalue. Further operating conditions required tobrightness control, are largely depending of theconstruction and the physical features of the lamp.

Tubular fluorescent lamps are divided into twogroups because of their different behaviour in thebrightness control.

Group I: Lamps with a tube diameterof 38 mm

Group II: Lamps with a tube diameterof 26 mm

The lamps of group I have been developed sincetimes and are well known, e.g. type series TL-M../..RS by Philips, L../..DS by Osram or F../..IrSby Sylvania. That are special constructions of thestandard fluorescent lamp with a tube diameter of38 mm that are used up to 1980. Since then thestandard series with 38 mm changes to the lamptype of group II, the so-called energy savinglamps with type names Lumilux by Osram, TL-DSuper 80 by Philips and 100/ES by Sylvania. It isnot possible to control the brightness of theselamps with the current devices.

Goals of the lamp manufacturers, to build specialconstructions by means of modifications, so thatthe control behaviour should be equal to thoselamps of group I, had not success.So complete new ways had to be gone. In themeantime so-called electronic ballast (EVG) isoffered, which make it possible to controlbrightness of a 26 mm standard-lamp, if they arecombined with dimmers for fluorescent lamps orwith 1-10V interfaces (see chapter 1.6). A specialconstruction of these lamps is no more necessary.At first the brightness control of the 38 mmlamps, the special lamps of Group I, is presentedin details. This is the conventional method ofbrightness control of fluorescent lamps.

As the fluorescent tube carries a filament at everyend, the two can not be supplied by one voltagesource, because then the voltage across the lampwould be shorted (the two filaments should beconnected with each other). Practically specialheating transformers with separated secondarywindings W2 and W3 for the electrode heating areused, as shown in the following figure.

Mains voltage

V

D W2 W3

W1

Figure: Fluorescent lamp with heating transformers

The primary winding W1 is applied to mainsvoltage and can be turned off by a switch in thedimmer D (which adjusts the current I3 in figureAdditional heating of a fluorescent lamp).In the operation of fluorescent lamps with heatingtransformers you must have a look onto extremelyclean lamp socket connectors. In the standardcircuit (Figure Fluorescent lamp circuit) thecomplete mains voltage is applied to aninterruption, which easily breaks through smalloxide or dust layers. By means of an interruptionin the heating circuits voltages only small morethan 5V are available (see figure Additionalheating of a fluorescent lamp).

Installing such a circuit, note, that the primarywinding W1 of the heating transformer has to beconnected absolutely to the total mains voltage,so the complete heating voltage is applied to theelectrodes independent of the dimmer position.

To achieve a better ignition of the lamp, so-calledignition assistance is required in transformersoperation. By means of dimmer operation thelamp must ignite (in dark position) at voltages,which lay quite above the lamp arc voltage, seefigure Voltage curves - Fluorescent lamp

Mains voltage

Arc voltage

U

Figure: Voltage curve - Fluorescent lamp

Chap.: 1.4 Page: 9

While this has to process hundred times persecond without flickering (without cuts), anauxiliary electrode is mounted on the outside ofthe tube. It is visible by means of the followingfigure, That the auxiliary electrode forms acapacity to the two mains electrodes (filaments).

U2

U

U2

Figure: Fluorescent lamp with auxiliary electrode

Since at least half the lamp voltage U is noweffective on the short distance between thefilament and the auxiliary electrode, sufficientlyhigh intensities of field (V/cm) are created, to startthe ignition. The total tube length lies between thetwo electrodes without auxiliary electrodes. So it iseasy to recognize, that the ignition assistance ismore important the longer the lamp will be.

In case of the 38 mm special lamps the auxiliaryelectrode is already mounted or burned inrespectively by the manufacturer. If necessary ithas to be earthed according to the manufacturersinformation due to safety reasons or it has to beconnected with an auxiliary-potential terminal ofthe ballast provided for that.

You can take from the figure Voltage curve -Fluorescent lamp, that the operation below the arcvoltage is no more possible. By means of thetrimmer Tr (Figure Extended Dimmer circuit) thedimmer has to be just adjusted, that the lamp willnot be deleted in the dark position and will notflicker. Since the arc voltage and the ignitionvoltage are mainly depending of the gas pressure,cleanness of the fill-gas, and on the one handthese features are varying in lamps of differentmanufacturers and on the other hand it willchange during the lamp life time and thesefeatures are decisively depending of the lamptube length and construction, it is easy to grasp,that you can expect the similar "dimmingbehaviour" only from similar lamps (same tubetype of the same manufacturer, same life time)

Basically you have to note, that bent or colouredfluorescent lamps are not suitable to brightnesscontrol. The so-called "Duo-circuit" can never beapplied in brightness control.

The so-called "Tandem-circuit" is possible inprinciple. But it is only applicable to lamps, whichtwice the arc voltage is less than the difference ofthe mains voltage and the voltage drop U V,appearing across the ballast. Practically thisrequirement is only fulfilled by 20 W lamps, butthey are not offered as 38 mm special lamps.Consequently a tandem-circuit can not be reallyinstalled.

After the above mentioned items and by means ofthe simplified presentation as shown in figureSwitching symbol Dimmer (Chap. 1.4.1.1), thedifference to a dimmer for incandescent lamps ismainly the terminal for the heating transformer(Figure Terminals of a dimmer for fluorescentlamps).In comparison to the dimmer forincandescent lamps it is not unimportant, how

Figure: Terminals of a dimmer forfluorescent lamps

and on what position the dimmer is inserted intothe installation: It has to be installed, where theload wire enters, since the - terminal isrequired to connect the heating transformer to the"not-dimmed "phase. If a dimmer for fluorescentlamps is mounted on the phase side, the -terminal is not applied to the total phase voltage,but to the controlled ("dimmed") voltage, as shownin the following figure:

Dimmer

N L1

Four-wayswitch

Two-wayswitch

false

Figure: False installation of a dimmer fluorescent lamps

Installing dimmers for fluorescent lamps youabsolutely have to plan the "resistive basic load"with a corresponding value according to themanufacture's information, since a correct

Chap.: 1.4 Page: 10

operation of the circuit can not be achieved (seefor details in "radio frequency interferencesuppression").

Not to overload a dimmer, the maximum loadvalue of the dimmer manufacturer is to note!The apparent power consumption (and only this isimportant to the dimmer power) of suitable speciallamps for brightness control is:

40 W / 120 cm = 95 VA65 W / 150 cm = 150 VA

These values have a wide deviation, and you arewell advised, not to load the dimmer with thecalculated value, but to keep a power reserve dueto lamp deviations and mains overvoltage (andwith that a higher power consumption of thelamp).The resistive basic load must be taken intoaccount.

To sum it, planning and installing of a continuousbrightness control of fluorescent lamps with adiameter of 38mm it is to note:

Conditions:• An additional heating transformer is required.

The starter is dropped. It has always to beremoved refurbishing the lights.

• Only so-called VA-dimmers are suitableDimmers for incandescent lamps cannot beused.

• An optimum brightness control will be reachedwith the fluorescent lamps designed for thiscase. Basically only rod tubes with 38 mmdiameter shall be used!

Installation:• Use for each dimmer fluorescent lamps of the

same length and type, thus a different dimmingbehaviour occurs, i.e. brightness differences

• If possible, use 40W lamps. They operate withthe best dimming behaviour in the lower rangeof the brightness.

• Each dimmer for fluorescent lamps requires aresistive minimum load of 25 W, the so-called"basic load". This load always should be anincandescent lamp. Other devices that arecalled "basic load" are not allowed to beused, because dimmer damages willappear.

• The brightness of the incandescent lamp isalso controlled, since it is connected in parallelto the fluorescent lamp.

• It is to note on good contacts of all terminals.Above all this apply to the contacts of the lampholder of the fluorescent lamp. The lampholder contacts of lights are designed forstarter with 230V. But a voltage of approx. 5Vis supplied by the heating circuit, which cancause heating current reduction due to anoxidation or even an interruption. Because ofthis in lights that are pre-wired for brightnesscontrol, contacts are used, which has contactwith aged surfaces and higher contactpressure.

• If required in table 3, the ignition assistance ofthe fluorescent lamp must be connected to theneutral or protective conductor.

• A faultless brightness control is only possible atambient temperatures above 10°C.

• Serial compensation is not allowed, but parallelcompensation of the mains wire. Acompensation of the control circuit is notallowed!

• Tandem circuits are no more recommended.Principally a lead-lag circuit is not possible.

• Using lamps for fluorescent lamps, the loadand phase connection shall not beexchanged. Doing this the heating voltage willbe dimmed!

Maximum permissible number of fluorescent lamps for a dimmer

Max. numberof lamps(pcs)

Rated power ofthe lamp(W)

Lamp length

(mm)

Apparent powerof a lamp(VA)

Total apparentpower(VA)

Basic load

(W)

600 VA Dimmer6 40 1200 95 570 +253 65 1500 150 450 +25

1000 VA Dimmer10 40 1200 95 950 +256 65 1500 150 900 +25

Table 1:Load the dimmer with the rated power only in case of ideal conditions. Otherwise look for power reduction.Possible faults and its removal

Chap.: 1.4 Page: 11

Kind of fault Removal

Lamp is flickering or goes out in the lowerbrightness range or does not ignite when turnedon

Check interruption of the heating filaments, whichmay be possible.

At first installation: Lamp does not ignite or goesout in the lower brightness range

Clean the lamp contacts(Use contact spray. if necessary)

Different control behaviour afterlamp replacement

Check interruption of the winding of the heatingtransformer, which may be possible

Lamp can not be turned on Check dimmer fuse

Lamp is flickering Check the earthing of the ignition aid, ifit is required

Brightness can not be reduced sufficiently or lamp turns off in the dimmer's dark position

Check, whether the lamp fro basic load isbrightening

Lamp only reaches the half brightness oris not able to be dimmed

Check the adjustment of the minimum brightness

Table 2:It no one of these measures will be successful, e.g. a triac damage may be the reason of the faultAttention: Dimmer repairs shall only be performed by the manufacturer!

Power reduction

Dimmer can be loaded up to the mentioned ratedpower only in case of ideal mounting conditions.Calculating the power of fluorescent lamps therated power of the lamp is not the basis, but theapparent power. Ideal mounting conditions exist,if:

• the room temperature, i.e. the dimmer ambienttemperature does not exceed 25°C

• the dimmer is mounted into a plaster or stonewall

• The dimmer is installed as a single device(combinations with socket outlets ormechanical switches are also accepted assingle installation)

The rated load of dimmer, i.e. the maximumpermissible load must be reduced of:

• 10 % per 5°C, exceeding the roomtemperature of 25°C

• 15 % for installation in wooden, false andhollow walls.

• 10 % for external devices in combination withadditional dimmers

• 20 % for internal devices in combinations with3 or more dimmers.

Example:600 W-Dimmer in combination with a 600W powerbooster in a stone wall at 30°C ambienttemperature.

Power reduction for• ambient temperature exceeding

of 5°C: 10 %• stone wall: 0 %• 2fold combination (only "external" devices):

10 %Sum: 20 %

Thus a maximum load per device:600W - 20% = 480W

Power extension

If the solution of a calculation shows a total loadbeing too high, so either a device with a higherrated power or a power booster must be used.

Chap.: 1.4 Page: 12

Using power booster the lamp circuit must beseparated into two different circuits (see chap.1.4.44 Power booster).Power boosters are suitable for incandescentlamps as well as fluorescent lamps.

Each Dimmer and power booster require onebasic load of 25 W.

If the total power of dimmers and power boosterare still not sufficient, more power boosters can beconnected. However, the corresponding numberof symmetrical load circuits must be planned.

In case of power extension please take notice ofthe technical conditions of connection of electricityboard/power stations. In Germany it is laid downtoday in TAB (TAB = TechnischeAnschlußbedingungen, Herausgeber VDEW 1991= Technical conditions of connection, publisherVDEW 1991), that in one installation up tomaximum 1700W incandescent lamps ormaximum 3400 VA fluorescent lamps can bedimmed connected to one phase.

If the power calculation results in an excess ofthese limits, by means of an application theelectricity board can permit a special approval.

Recommendations for fluorescent lamps used in lighting controls

Manu-facturer

Type Light colour Colourrenderingindex

Length(mm)

lumi-nousflux(lm)

Apparentpower (VA)

Ignitionassistance

requiredmin.heatingvoltage(V)

Osram L40 W/21 DS Weiß 1 1200 3000 95 Earth the foil 6,5Osram L40 W/31 DS Warmton 1 1200 3000 95 Earth the foil 6,5Osram L65 W/21 DS Weiß 1 1500 5000 150 Earth the foil 6,5Osram L65 W/31 DS Warmton 1 1500 5000 150 Earth the foil 6,5

Philips TL-M40W/33 RS Weiß 3 1200 3100 95 Do not earth 3,7Philips TL-M40W/83 RS Warmton 1 1200 3200 95 Do not earth 3,7Philips TL-M40W/84 RS Weiß 1 1200 3200 95 Do not earth 3,7Philips TL-M65W/33 RS Weiß 3 1500 5000 150 Do not earth 3,7Philips TL-M65W/83 RS Warmton 1 1500 5000 150 Do not earth 3,7Philips TL-M65W/84 RS Weiß 1 1500 5000 150 Do not earth 3,7

Sylvania F40 W/CW/IRS Hellweiß 3 1200 3200 95 Do not earth 3,7Sylvania F40 W/CWX/IRS Weiß Delux 1 1200 2000 95 Do not earth 3,7Sylvania F65 W/CW/IRS Hellweiß 3 1500 5100 150 Do not earth 3,7Sylvania F65 W/CWX/IRS Weiß Delux 1 1500 3300 150 Do not earth 3,7

Table 3

Heating transformers with a secondary voltage of approx. 6 V can be used for all fluorescent lamps.Standard lamps with a tube diameter of 38 mm are replaced by fluorescent lamps with tube diameter of26 mm and are no more recommended for use in brightness controls.Fluorescent lamps with a tube diameter of 26 mm with the marking Lumilux (Osram), TL-D Super 80(Philips), 100/ES (Sylvania) are counted as type series of group II. Brightness control is only possible withspecial devices.

Chap.: 1.4 Page: 13

Brightness control of lamps with tubediameter of 26 mm (Group II)

The advantages of a higher efficacy or a bettercolour rendering index respectively of the so-called energy saving lamps with a tube diameterof 26 mm (group II) have been reached withconcessions to the ignition willingness.

The brightness control is not possible withconventional measure used for 38mm lamps.

It is known since long times, that the efficacy offluorescent lamp increases by means of anincreasing frequency of the operating voltage.With that the ignition willingness is considerablyimproved at the same time. This effect is used tocontrol the brightness of 26 mm energy savinglamps of the group II.

High frequency operating voltages of the lampcan not be taken from the mains and have to becreated from the 50 Hz mains by a suitabledevice. The following picture shows the principlemethod.

Dimmer Rectifier Inverter

Lampheating

Electronic ballast

230 VMains

~40 kHz

Figure: Principle of electronic ballast forfluorescent lamps

At first a direct current is generated from themains, which is then transformed into a highfrequency lamp operation voltage by an electronicinverter. The electronic required for that iscomposed in a so- called electronic ballast(German: Elektronisches Vorschaltgerät (EVG).The limitation of the lamp current is performed bythe electronic ballast, so that a conventionalcopper-iron-ballast is replaced.

A separate heating transformer is also no morerequired, since the electronic ballast also offersthe heating voltage.

It is transparent, that electronic ballasts are morecomplicated than conventional copper-iron-ballast.But they offer some additional advantages apartfrom possibility to control also the 26 mm energysaving lamps.

The operating frequency, i.e. the frequency of thelamp voltage, is set to approx. 40 - 100 kHz, whilethe frequency lies above the audible range (< 15kHz) and is selected not too high to avoiddisturbances and heat.

An additional advantage is low power dissipationof the electronic ballast compared with a copper-iron-choke. So energy is saved and the devicedoes not become too hot.

Finally, an electronic ballast hardly create reactivecurrent, and is almost operating as a resistive load(power factor cos ϕ > 0,95), so compensationcapacitors are no more applicable. So, morelamps may be connected than in a conventionalbrightness control.

If installing new installations a further importantadvantage appears. Because the lamp heatingvoltage is fixed constantly by the electronic ballastand is independent of the brightness, an additionalinstallation of the non-dimmed and only switchedphase from the dimmer to the luminaire is notnecessary. With that the retrofitting from theswitching to the dimming operation is very simple,while the current installation can be used withoutchanges.

Naturally, the new installation of the luminaire isnot saved.

In table 4 the advantages of a brightness controlof the 26 mm lamps using electronic ballasts arepresented and compared with the conventionalmethods of controlling the 38 mm lamp.

Chap.: 1.4 Page: 14

Brightness control of 38 mm lamps 26 mm lampsLamp type Special lamp Standard lampDevices for a double luminaire 2 ballasts

2 heating transformersperhaps. 1 compensationcapacitor

1 electronic ballast2 filter chokes

true power consumption for 2lampswith the same brightness

e.g. lamp type L65DS180 W

e.g. lamp type L58W/21113 W

Apparent powerPower factor

∼300 VAcos ϕ ∼0,58

∼118 VAcos ϕ >0,95

max. permissible number oflamps per e.g. 600 W dimmer

e.g. lamp type L65 DS3 lamps

e.g. lamp type L58 W/2110 lamps

Heating of the ballast considerable lessOperating noise 50 Hz hum noneAmount of installation- luminaire equal- supply wires to the dimmer refitting the not-dimmed phase

is necessaryno change necessary

Table 4

Note:As a result of the better light efficiency in the highfrequency operation with electronic ballasts, thetrue power consumption is reduced e.g. of 2 lampsof the type L 58 W/21 with 116 W at 50 Hz to100W at 40 kHz (same maximum brightness).

The true power consumption of an electronicballast with 2 pieces 58 W lamps of 113W isseparated in a)

lamp power (100 W+ heating power+ electronic ballast power consumption+ losses in the suppression filters.

1.4.1.4 Speed regulatorIn principle speed regulator are constructedsimilar to dimmer for LV-lamps with inductiveconventional transformers (see figure Simplestdimmer circuit, chap.1.4.1.1. and Circuit LVhalogen dimmer, chap. 1.4.1.2).

In speed regulators a suppression capacitor C1 isalso connected in parallel to a series circuit of aresistor and capacitor, which on the one handattenuate the radio frequency suppression circuit(see "Radio frequency interference suppression"),so that in spite of the inductive load no "resistivebasic load" is required and on the other hand it iscaused just by the RC-circuit, that the triac isswitched-on at all. Due to the inductive motorload, the current in the load circuit increases witha delay. Often the triac holding current is just notreached, when the short firing pulse at the gate

disappears again. The triac then returnsimmediately into the blocking state. The RC-element, connected in parallel to the triac, isexisting to supply the current after the firing untilthe load current exceeds the triac holding current.So, a normal incandescent lamp dimmer is notsuitable to control motors.

A small difference is given between the speedregulator and a LV-dimmer That differenceconcerns the smallest adjustable output voltage:Using LV-dimmer, the manufacturer has toguarantee that the adjustment of the minimumallows a remaining brightness of the lighting, thatwill be visible. Otherwise someone could work atlive parts, because he is thinking, the installationis switched-off and could run into danger of anelectrical shock.Thus, relatively high minimum output voltage ofthe LV-dimmer is not necessary for speedregulator and it is unwanted, because the motor isnot able to reach the lowest speed. Due to that,speed regulators are equipped with potentiometerin its mounting plate. the customer can adjust thebasic speed by means of this potentiometer .

Fundamentally all one-phase motors can becontrolled by means of that principle of phase-cut-on control applied to speed regulators (inductionmotors, split-pole motors, universal motors).

But a control is only sensible, if power must becontrolled, e.g. ventilators (small speed = small airflow = small desired power), but not in case ofdrilling machines, which power must be

Chap.: 1.4 Page: 15

independent of the speed (power = torque xspeed, reduced speed = reduced power).This is in the opposite to mechanical switchinggears, whose torque is increased equally to thereduction of the speed).

The speed regulator is offered with a rated powerof 600 VA. The rated power corresponds to amounting in wall boxes. If the device is mountedin surface-mounting housings, the rated power hasto be reduced due to the unfavourable conditionsof the heat dissipation.

L

NMains 230 V

Speed regulator

M

Motor

Adjustment ofbasic speed

Figure: Series circuit of speed regulator and motor

1.4.2 Dimmers with touch operationThe brightness is depending from the position ofthe potentiometer, if dimmers with rotary knob areused. That is also the time when the triacbecomes conductive in a mains half wave. Tochange the brightness, the knob must be turnedand so the position of the potentiometer wiper isadjusted. Consequently, a mechanical equipmentserves for saving and changing the brightnessvalue,

For this reason dimmers with rotary knob are oftencalled "mechanical dimmer".

In contrast to this, fully electronic installationdevices form a group of dimmers or switches, inthat the function of the potentiometer is taken overby an electronic circuit. The advantage of thiscontrol circuit is, that the switching and dimmingprocess can not only be started withmanually operated elements, but also withelectrical signals.

The following picture shows the principleconstruction of a full electronic installation device.

Loadswitche.g.triac

Controlelectronic

Externalelectroniccontrol unit

K

LN

1

Figure: Block circuit of a fully electronicinstallation device

The load switch, for example the triac, is triggeredby the control electronic. It is influenced by meansof an operation element, for example short-touchbutton K or also by means of an externalelectronic control unit. Since this can act ontolight, sound or other physical quantities,completely new effects can be reached with fullyelectronic installation devices.

However, already the special construction of theinternal control electronic enables devicefunctions with high convenience in operation,which can not be realized with mechanicaldimmers.

1.4.2.1 Touch dimmers for incandescent lamps

The touch dimmer contains a control electronic,which takes different functions. Solely by meansof different long operations of the short-touch key,both switching instructions and dimminginstructions can be set. A short touch switches thelamps. A longer touch changes the brightnessautomatically. If a dimming procedure isinterrupted, the brightness remains on the valuereached at last.

The control electronic has to notice:

1. Switching instruction "Off" means: The triac willnot be supplied with firing pulses.

2. Switching instruction "On" means: Switch ontofull brightness, i.e. the triac has to be suppliedcontinuously with a firing pulse just at thebeginning of every mains voltage half wave.

3. Switching instruction "Dimming" means: Theposition of the firing pulse varies automaticallywith a suitable time and runs through the wholecontrol range from minimum and maximumbrightness

Chap.: 1.4 Page: 16

4. Hold the brightness on a constant value: Firingpulses must switch the triac with the corre-sponding delay in each mains half wave.

The figure Block circuit touch dimmer controlcircuit shows the function.

The signal recognition detects either a switchingor a dimming instruction set by the short-touchkey.

While the type of the instruction is depending onthe period of touching, the signal recognitionmust get an information after which time it shoulddecide for either the one or the other instruction.This times are generated by the clock frequencygenerator from the mains frequency.

Three time slots can be distinguished:

1. Short touches within 0 to 0.06 seconds areignored because they could be created bymains disturbances.No change of the dimming or switching statewill occur in this period.

2. A touch period of 0.06 to 0.4 seconds is a

switching instruction. This information is

transferred to the brightness memory, whichstores the new switching state and informs thecomparator to create or not to create triggerpulses.

3. If the key is touched for a longer period (> 0.4sec), the brightness memory gets theinstruction to vary the brightness. For that, acounter is started which runs across a loop inapproximately 7 seconds. At the same timethe cycle counter receives a count enablesignal. It has the same counting range, but itwill run faster, i.e. within a mains half wave(10 ms). If the information in the brightnessmemory and the cycle counter fit, aninstruction is given to the trigger pulsegenerator.

The trigger pulse output logic serves, thebrightness is notfalling below a just well-visible minimum basicbrightness duringthe dimming procedure.

By means of the memory switch, which can beoperated through the mounting plate, the controlbehaviour of the brightness memory is influenced.

LN

Trigger pulse

Output logicand driver

Comparator

Memoryswitch

Cyclecounter

Brightnessmemory

Step counter

Signalevaluation

+RecognitionSwitching/Dimming

Clock frequency generation

ON OFF

K

11

Control circuit IC

Figure: Block diagram of the touch dimmer - control circuit

Memory switch = OffIf the dimmer is turned off, a switching instructionleads to switch-on to maximum brightness.In this case, a dimming instruction causes adimming function starting from the minimumbrightness level. The control direction remains,when the dimming is repeated.

Memory switch = OnSwitching-off by means of a switching instruction,the preceding brightness is stored and set again,when switching-on again by means of switchinginstruction. If the dimmer is switched-off, adimming instruction leads to a dimming function,which takes care of the preceding brightness. Bymeans of repeated dimming the control directionis reversed.

Chap.: 1.4 Page: 17

The signal evaluation can decide after thecorresponding touch period, whether a switchingor a dimming instruction is desired. So aswitching process is started when the short-touchkey is released. A dimming process is startedwith a delay of 0.4 seconds.

The speed of the brightness variation isdetermined by the pulses of clock signalgeneration. These signals are derived from themains frequency.

Consequently, the dimming cycle time (for adark-bright-dark process) of 7 seconds is onlyvalid at 50 Hz. A dimming process is faster at 60Hz (approx. 5.8 seconds). If a switchinginstruction follows a dimming instruction, thetouch dimmer is always switched-off.

Reducing high currents at switching-on the coldlamps, the control circuit possesses a "softstart".At switching-on, the brightness is continuouslycontrolled starting from the minimum brightnessto the end value. The time to maximumbrightness takes 380 ms. Lamps, electronic and,above all, the integrated fuse of the dimmer areprotected.

Such complicated control circuits could not bedesigned with discrete components (transistors,resistors, capacitors). An installation device doesnot supply enough space for these components.

This is the reason, the complete control circuitwas summed up in an integrated circuit (IC).Nevertheless, some additional externalcomponents are required to complete the touchdimmer, for example the power supply of thecontrol circuit. It requires a direct voltage oftypically 5 V, which has to be formed from themains voltage.

The touch dimmer should replace a mechanicalswitch without changing the installation wires. Sono connection of the neutral conductor wasallowed. Hence the mains voltage is not directlyoffered to the dimmer and to its current supply ofthe control circuit. Figure Current supply withmissing neutral conductor shows clearly, themains voltage is applied to the dimmer terminalsA and B, when the triac is in the switched-offstate, the dimmer blocks (dashed line figure b).When the triac is conductive, the voltage U T isdecreasing to the residual voltage less than 2 V,which is not sufficient for the control electronic.

To guarantee the triggering of the triac, themains voltage must reach a minimum value togenerate the required holding current of the triac.This process has to work also, if the triac is firedvery early in a mains half wave. Figure b showsthat always a residual voltage stays across thetriac, which is sufficient, to charge the capacitoronto a value, that it can supply the voltage of thecontrol circuit for the remaining time. The figureExtended

UT

IC

Touch dimmerA

B

a)

1UT

+UH

-UH

t

b)

Figure: Current supply at missing neutral conductor

control circuit is showing, that only a negativeresidual voltage is necessary for charging. Therectifier diode ensures, that the charge of thecapacitor will not flow back into the mains andsolely can be used for the current supply of thecontrol circuit during the remaining mains voltage.

The Zener diode serves for voltage limitation.Naturally also the touch dimmer includes thecomponents C and Dr for the radio frequencyinterference suppression, which are necessary ina phase-cut-on control circuit.

If the short-touch key is operated to set switchingor dimming instructions, the control terminal 1 isconnected to the mains wire. Simultaneously themains voltage is the reference potential of thedirect voltage supply of control IC. In off-state theIC control input S is connected to the directvoltage supply by the protection resistors R.

Chap.: 1.4 Page: 18

LN

Touch dimmer

ON OFF

Memory

IC

To furtherkeysSi

1

L

Control

Dr

T

D

C Z

K

R

R

R

C

LR

CZ

Z

Figure: Extended touch dimmer circuit

Figure Extended touch dimmer circuit shows, thatit does not matter, that the short touch key is builtin the touch dimmer or is an external one. Bymeans of this construction, it is possible to setboth switching and dimming instructions fromdifferent parallel -connected push buttons. Sinceonly two connection wires are necessary to theexternal push buttons, the existing 2-way or 4-way switch circuit can be easily refitted withoutinstallation changes.

The touch dimmer is suitable for incandescentlamps and mains voltage halogen lamps (highvoltage halogen lamps). It can not be used inbrightness control of fluorescent lamps, while itcan not be adjusted for a basic brightness and ithas also no connection for a heating transformer.For dimming of LV halogen lamps, a LV touchdimmer is to use which has been developed forthis application (Chap. 1.4.2.2). In case of mainsinterruptions the charge of the IC operationvoltage capacitor CL stays for 1 sec, to save theprevious switching state. After that time the touchdimmer is in off-state.

Because the internal required counter pulses aregenerated from the mains frequency, anundisturbed 50 Hz rhythm is necessary toguarantee a faultless operation of the touchdimmer.

To ignore mains disturbances, the zero crossingsof the mains are taken as reference, so nearly nointerferences occur in that time by means ofswitching operations of other mains operateddevices.

But centralized multi-purpose pulses with highenergy are used for remote switching purposesby the electricity board. They can be added to thezero crossing.

In this cases wrong counts will be born in the IC.Undesired triac firings results and can be seenas a flickering, but they will disappear then.

If the rated power of the touch dimmer is notsufficient, it is possible to connect Powerboosters. Information is given in chapter 1.4.4power extension.

1.4.2.2 LV touch dimmer for conventional transformers

It is also desired to control the brightness of LVhalogen lamps, that are supplied by windedtransformers. A LV touch dimmer can be used,that has been developed for this application. Inits construction all basic ideas for dimming ofinductive loads mentioned in chapter 1.4.1.2, arerealized and it possesses all features and thecomfortable operation of the touch dimmer,described in chapter 1.4.2.1.

Explanations to the figure: Principle circuit of thetouch dimmer

The components D, R,CI and Z form the directcurrent supply of the control electronic. Thecontrol IC gives pulses of varying duration to thetriac that are depending on the operation time ofthe attached key K. These firing pulses areextended in an additional circuit to avoid,

Chap.: 1.4 Page: 19

LN

LV touch dimmer

ON OFF

Memory

Firing pulseextension IC

to further keys

Th

Si

1

L

Control

Dr

T

D

C Z

K

R

R

R

C

LR

CZ

Z

Figure: Principle circuit of the LV touch dimmer

that oscillations of the switching-on current willturn the triac off by means of high loadimpedances

The components C and Dr serve for radiointerference suppression of the device, thethermal switch Th turns the dimmer off in case ofoverheating and turns it on automatically if it iscooled down.

By means of the path Rz/Cz, the control IC getsinformation about the triac's switching state. Sothe IC recognizes a possible mal-firing of thetriac and generates new firing pulses.

The LV touch dimmer contains the followingadditional circuits, compared with a touchdimmer for incandescent lamps:

1. The triac firing pulse supplied by the controlIC is extended in time by the circuit block"Firing pulse extension" (see figure Principlecircuit of the LV touch dimmer). This isnecessary to guarantee the triac will not returnto the blocking state again due to the delaytime of the load current. This may bepossible, if highly inductive transformers withsmall lamp load are switched-on.

2. An additional protection against thermaloverload of the LV touch dimmer is reachedby means of the bimetallic switch in the loadcurrent circuit, which turns the device off incase of overheating. It returns to its initialstate, if it is cooled down.

3. As it is well known, transformers react withhumming, heating and possibly with adamage on direct current portions in theirprimary current. This problem is prevented,since the control IC monitors the switchingstate of the triac and with it the current of thetransformer by the circuit Rz and Cz (seefigure Principle circuit of the LV touchdimmer). If a direct current portion is detected,the control IC tries to remove the directcurrent portion by new firings. If it is notsuccessfully, the control IC turns off. So thelighting is switched-off. The dimmer can beset in operation by means of switching-off andswitching-on then.

The power of LV touch dimmers can be extendedby Power boosters. Information can be read inchapter 1.4.4.

Chap.: 1.4 Page: 20

1.4.3 Remote control dimmer1.4.3.1 IR-dimmer for incandescent lampsSee general product description IR-dimmers

1.4.3.2 IR-LV-dimmers for conventional transformers

see general product description IR-dimmers

General product description of the IR-dimmer:

The touch dimmers for incandescent lamps andtouch dimmers for LV-halogen lighting withconventional inductive transformers that aredescribed in chapter 1.4.2.1 and 1.4.2.2, areoffered as a variant, which allows the operationby an IR remote control.

These variants are electrically and functionallynot very differently, but the mounting plates ofthe remote controlled devices have 3 contactsockets in addition. They serve for the insertingof the contact pins of the IR receiver of the flushmounting devices (see chapter 1.7.3).

So these IR-dimmers are composed of therespective IR-dimmer (Insertion for flushmounting) and the IR receiver for flush mountingdevices, as shown in figure Modular assembly ofthe IR-dimmer. Both parts are plugged together,so that they form one unit. Before plugging-in theIR-receiver, the desired channel has to be set onits back, that is according to the key of the IRtransmitter.The influences by means of centralized multi-service pulses (control pulses) which are

mentioned in chapter 1.4.2.1, may occur also inIR-dimmers. They are influencing directly thecontrol electronic of the dimmer and can not besuppressed by the IR receiver. In the same wayall other possibilities and special features areapplicable to the IR dimmer, that have beendescribed to the touch dimmer (chapter 1.4.2.1),i.e. the connection of additional external pushbuttons, information about the kind of load.

The range of an IR handheld transmitter is verydepending from the place in relation to thereceiver. The range is reduced by a radiationfrom the side or the receiver is mounted in theshadow of the furniture. In most cases even asignal transmission "round the corner" is enabledby means of the high sensitivity of the receiver.IR signals are often reflected intensively enoughby the opposite walls.

Working on the limit of the range, malfunctionsmay occur, but that does not indicate any defectin the product. A telegram has to be detected fora longer period of the transmission of a dimmcommand. If transmission gaps will exist in thelimit range, the results are interruptions in thedimming operation and on/off switchings. By that,it can be explained, switching commands can bebetter transmitted, as they need an essentialshorter transmission time.

Similar effects are not known using IR-switchesor IR-push buttons. These devices have eitherreceived or not received the command, so theswitching command has to be repeated, ifnecessary. This is well known from the TVremote controls.

ON OFFMemory

Memory switch

Dimmer

ContactsocketsBuchsen

1 234

5678

Channelswitch

IR receiver

Contact pins

Figure: Modular assembly of the IR-dimmer

Chap.: 1.4 Page: 21

1.4.4 Power extensionGeneral:The Power booster is an auxiliary device, thatallows to increase the switched power ofelectronic or mechanical switches. It is similar toa relay. Using that, it is possible to switch a highload current I by a small control current i, asshown in the following figure.

I

i

1

L1

N

Figure: Principle of the Power booster

We must enable fast switching (e.g. dimmer with100 Hz) and have designed an electronic circuit,that is shown together with an electronicinstallation device ( dimmer or switch) in thefigure Power booster with dimmer .The total load is separated into two partial loads,lamp 1 (L1) and lamp 2 (L2). As long as the triacT1 is blocked in the controlling device, novoltage is applied to L1. Consequently, no controlcurrent is flowing into the gate of T2. So L2 isswitched-off. If T1 is fired and L1 is applied to themains voltage, in this moment T2 is fired bymeans of i. L2 is switched with the samefrequency as L1. The switching-off is performedby the triac features in the zero-crossing of thecurrent I (see chap. 1.2.1 "Diode and triac"). Theoperation becomes critically, if the loads L1 andL2 will contain different cos ϕ, that means

different times of the zero crossings of the loadcurrents.

When the current I flowing in the load L2 is justzero and the current is still flowing through L1, T2switches-off for a short period, but then it is firedimmediately again, because mains voltage is stillapplied to L1 and a gate current i is flowing. Evenwhen T1 is switched-off shortly after that, T2stays conductive for a complete current halfwave, because a switching-off is only possible ina current zero-crossing. A fluorescent lamp willshine always brightly ( because L2 ispermanently switched-on, respectively is alwaysfired just after blocking), even if L1 is "dimmed".To avoid this unwanted operation state, asymmetrical separation has to be ensured incase of inductive loads (L1 = L2, that means cos ϕ1 = cos ϕ2).

It is not allowed to connect the load wires of thedimmer and the Power booster . The reason isthe short time delay of the dimmer and the Powerbooster when switching-on. The dimmer would beloaded with the total lamp load of the lightinginstallation for the time until the Power boosterhas fired. That is not allowed.

The Power booster itself contains radio frequencysuppression components. So the requirement ofa "resistive basic load" is also applied to thePower booster ( see "Radio frequencysuppression"). If a separate possibility of aswitch-on and off of the Power booster load isdesired, you have to note that the switch is fittedin the control circuit - that is the wire from theload terminal of the controlling device to theterminal 1 of the Power booster. In no case it isallowed to disconnect the load circuit. Acorresponding switching-off is generally notpossible, because the control conditions of thePower booster are disturbed.

T1 T21

I

Powerbooster

Lamp 2

Controlling device(e.g. dimmer)

Lamp 1

L

N

i

Figure: Power booster with dimmer

Chap.: 1.4 Page: 22

When using Power boosters, the dimmer must beconnected always directly to a lamp loadaccording to the dimmer specification, because asmall load of the Power booster is not sufficientfor faultless operation.

Depending on the mains voltage and the chosenlamp, minor differences in brightness betweenthe dimmer load and the load at the Powerbooster may occur

The technical connection conditions of the powerstations are limiting the connection without anyapplication of phase-cut-on devices operating atone phase to 1700 W for incandescent lampsand to 3400 VA for fluorescent lamps. UsingPower boosters, these limits may only beexceeded by an approval of the power stations.

1.4.4.1 Power booster UPThe Power booster UP serves for powerextension of the dimmer for incandescent lampsand fluorescent lamps by 600 W/VA. Dimmersfor LV halogen lamps are not allowed to beconnected since the Power booster UP is notdesigned for strongly inductive loads.

To compensate minor, unavoidable unsymmetryof the inductive loads L1 and L2, the resistor inthe Power booster is designed as a trimmer. So adelay in firing is adjustable and the re-firing of T2is avoided. Both lamps L1 and L2 shine with thesame brightness in case of a minor firing delay. Ifthe trimmer is set to higher firing delay times (tocorrect higher unsymmetry), the lamp L2 isforced to be noticeable darker than L1. To avoidunsymmetry you should pay attention to sameload distribution of the controlling device and thePower booster. You have to avoid the mixture ofdifferent lamp types.

1.4.4.2 LV-Recessed Power boosterThe LV-recessed Power booster was designedfor the power extension of all LV phase-cut-ondimmers for conventional transformers.However, it is suitable to use it for the powerextension of standard incandescent lamps, asthis is an additional feature of the LV insertion inthe Power booster.

The operation principle of the used dimmer (turnknob, push button, remote control) is insignificantto the LV-recessed Power booster. But it isrequired to use dimmers operating with the cut-on principle.

The device has a built-in housing which is knownfrom the TRONIC-transformer product range,and so it is well suitable to be pushed into falseceilings or to be surface mounted.

212

46

48,5

Figure: Housing LV recessed Power booster

The power extension of each LV recessed Powerbooster is 600 W. This total power may not beexceeded. Attention ! You have to pay attentionon the efficiency of the transformer whencalculating the total power.

The minimum load may not be smaller than 100W/VA, because then flickering and malfunctionswill occur.

It is allowed to connect• inductive transformers with toroidal core or E-

core,• standard incandescent lamps,• LV halogen lamps( max. 500 W) or• a mixture of the loads specified above

Large lighting installation with inductivetransformers and standard incandescent lampsand LV halogen lamps can be controlled by up to10 LV recessed Power boosters. But all Powerboosters should be loaded equally, sincedifferences in the brightness will appear.

A softstart of the LV recessed Power booster ofapprox. 1-2 sec was necessary due to theelectronic circuit. Because of that a small timedelay in switching-on the lamps of the dimmer (e.g. touch dimmer with softstart approx. 250 ms)and the lamps of the LV recessed Power boosteris to be expected.

Protective features of the device in case ofcritical operation conditions:

Short circuit:Permanent disconnection by means of anelectronic fuse. No fuse replacement is required.The short circuit has to be solved and thecorresponding dimmer has to be switched-onagain.

Open circuit:The device is protected against open circuit. Sothe inductive transformers may be loaded as youlike. You have to note the output voltage of thetransformer to ensure a long lifetime of the lamps.

Chap.: 1.4 Page: 23

Overtemperature:Disconnection in case of thermal overload. Anautomatic re-start is expected after cooling.

DC voltage parts:As conventional transformers may be destroyedby DC parts in its supply voltage, the LVrecessed Power booster monitors the outputvoltage and regulates the DC parts. If they arenot able to be regulated, the LV recessed Powerbooster switches-off. In this case you have tocheck the installation for a defect and afterremoving the defect, the installation may be setin operation.

For LV dimmer and LV Power booster you haveto use one phase. It is not allowed to exchangeL and N at the Power booster. Otherwisemalfunction will occur.

One possible installation of the device is shownin figure Example of the LV recessed Powerbooster. The example presents a LV touchdimmer and an extension unit.

The LV recessed Power booster is not suitablefor a switching-free, as it does not galvanicallyseparate the load in case of a the dimmer beingswitched-off.

Mains230 V

LN

max. 10L 1 N

1N N

1N N

1

LV touch dimmer

LV-recessedpower booster

LV-recessedpower booster

max. 500 W

max. 600 W

max. 600 W

1

Extension

Figure: Example of a wiring with LV-recessed Power boosters

Lighting installations with a load greater than3500 W have to be separated to 2 circuits on onephase. The circuit breakers of these circuit haveto be coupled mechanically to ensure aswitching-free of voltage of all poles of thelighting installation, see figure Coupled MCBsused with Power boosters

Technical date:

Rated voltage: 230 V AC

Connecting load:stand. incandescent lamps: 100-600 WLV-halogen lamps withinductive transformer: 100-500 VA

HV-halogen lamps: 100-500 WMixed load with specified kind ofload without HV-halogen lamps: 100-600 WMixed load with specified kind ofload with HV-halogen lamps: 100-500 W

Softstart: approx. 1-2 seconds

Short circuit proof: Disconnection withinapprox.. 100 ms

Ambient temperature (Ta): max. 45 °C

Housing temperature (Tc): max. 70 °C

Chap.: 1.4 Page: 24

I >I >

L1L2L3N

N NL3 L3

max.16Amax.16A

2 pole MCB-

max. 3500 W max. 3500 W

LV - Dimmer

LV Power booster

-

per 16 A MCB per 16 A MCB

ind. transformers ind. transfomers

max. 600 W max. 600 W

max. 600 Wmax. 600 W

max. 6500 W

max. 500 W

Figure: Coupled MCBs used with Power boosters

Chap.: 1.5 Page: 1

R1 L1

C1R2

C2

R3 L3

C3

R4 L2

trans-former

Triac

Dimmer TRONIC-transformer

Mains

Figure: Connection of a dimmer for incandescent lamps and a TRONIC transformer

1.5 Phase-cut-off dimmer forTRONIC-transformersTRONIC-dimmers are specially designed forTRONIC-transformers. They enable thebrightness control of:

− LV halogen lamps which are connected toTRONIC-transformers

− standard incandescent lamps for 230V− halogen lamps for 230 V

Electronic transformers of other manufacturersare also able to be connected, but we require toconsult us previously. Not all types oftransformers contain quality features, which arenecessary for the interworking of dimmers andtransformers, i.e. the radio frequencysuppression or the protection against spikes maynot be guaranteed.

Attention:Inductive loads (50 Hz transformer) are notallowed to be connected!

Conventional phase-cut-on dimmers are mainlynot suitable for dimming of electronictransformers. Humming and flickering shallbecome evident.

The reason should be explained by means of thefigure Connection of a dimmer for incandescentlamps and a TRONIC transformer. Thetransformer contains an input network (R3, R4,L2, L3, C3), which is required for the radiofrequency suppression. The same is evident forthe output of the dimmer (R1, L1, C1, R2, C2).By means of the series circuit of the dimmer andtransformer, these components form anoscillating circuit with different resonantfrequencies, if switching-on with steep edge in a50 Hz half wave. The changes in the amplitudeof the operating voltage being generated by thislead to different firing and interruptions of theoperating frequency and so to flickering of thelamps.

If the inductivities have been chosen too high,some resonance points are in the range ofaudibility (16 Hz - 16 kHz) and are registered asan unpleasant "humming". An attenuation of theoscillation according to the radio frequencysuppression will be unsatisfactory because theinput impedance of each transformer type isdesigned in a different way. Even if theinterworking of dimmer and one transformer isdesigned very well, a connection of moretransformers cause new conditions, which canlead to undesired resonances.

The best way to avoid this problems is possibleby means of the usage of a dimmer operatingwith the phase-cut-off principle. The followingfigure shows the differences of the two dimmingprinciples.

t

i

t10 ms

zt

i a) phase-cut-on

b) phase-cut-off

Figure: Timing diagram of the dimmer principles

No current is flowing at the time tz in the phase-cut-on dimmer. After this time a sudden switch-on occurs, which leads to high voltagerespectively current peaks. Because of this theabove mentioned oscillations and additionalinterference voltages are created at each mainshalf wave. In the zero-crossing of the mains halfwave it is switched-off. Triacs are used as theseswitches.

Chap.: 1.5 Page: 2

In contrast to this, a phase-cut-off dimmer isswitched-on in the zero-crossing of the mainshalf wave and switched-off after the time tz. So itis possible to change the effective value of thelamp voltage and also of the brightness, at theswitch-on moment no interference voltages canoccur, because the voltage has the value zero.At the switch-off moment possible resonancepoints are heavily attenuated, because the totalload of the transformer is effective. Theswitching-off is created by means of an extendededge, not suddenly

Additional networks are not required for thesuppression of inference voltages. Theresonance points with the unpleasant hummingrespectively flickering phenomenons, which weare being afraid of, will not occur.

TRONIC-dimmers operate with the phase-cut-offprinciple. They can be used for electronictransformers and for high voltage incandescentlamps. Inductive loads (conventional 50 Hztransformers) may not be connected to.

Special features:

− Short circuit protection (without wire fuse):automatic restart after solving the shortcircuit, permanent disconnection until newswitching-on at short circuits longer than 7seconds

− less noisy operation (no suppression chokerequired)

− Overload protection, automatic load reduction− Overtemperature protection− Load limitation in case of the arc generation

of lamps− Softstart (gentle switch-off of lamps)− Protection against mains spikes− Radio frequency suppressed.

In addition all normal features of the conven-tional dimmers are effective.

1.5.1 Dimmers with rotary or push knob1.5.1.1 TRONIC-dimmer (315 W)

Controlcircuit

FET

TRONIC-Transformer

TRONIC-Transformer

Halogenlamp

N

TRONIC-DimmerTH

Figure: TRONIC-dimmer: Principle circuit

In the previous figure the principle circuit of aTRONIC-dimmer and the connection of anelectronic transformer can be seen.

Dimmer and transformer must be connected inseries and several transformers may be operatedin parallel.

A field effect transistor (MOSFET) is used for theswitching function. The control circuit serves forswitching-on in the zero-crossing and forswitching-off after the chosen time tz, see figureTiming diagram of the dimmer principles. TheMOSFET and the control circuit need a DCvoltage, which is provided by the rectifier bridge.

To avoid an overloading of the dimmer, atemperature switch is connected before. Itdisconnects the dimmer from the mains in caseof overload or overtemperature.Control circuit:The following figure shows the structure in blocks.

MOSFETwith control

Timing stage

Zero pointdetection

Voltage supply

Switch-offdelay

Shortcircuitprotection

to the rectifier

Figure: TRONIC-dimmer: Control circuit

Chap.: 1.5 Page: 3

In the block MOSFET with control the switching-on and -off is ensured within each mains halfwave. Additional components protect theMOSFET against overvoltage and spikes.

The timing stage controls the MOSFET andsupports the adjustment of the time tz by apotentiometer and with that it controls thebrightness. The component that is mostly used isa monostable multivibrator (monoflop).

The zero point detection serves for a correctswitching-on in each half wave.

A short circuit protection guarantees theswitching-off in case of short-circuit or overload.A wire fuse is not necessary. The appearance ofan arc in case of "burning-through" of the lampfilament is avoided by the current limitation. Agentle softstart will be generated automaticallysolving the short circuit, if the short circuit is notstaying longer than 7 seconds. Otherwise theload is switched-off until the mains isdisconnected.

A switch-off delay prevents oscillations, whichoccur at switching-off and are visible asflickering. The block voltage supply supports allstages with the required voltages.

Information: The adjusting regulation of theTRONIC-dimmer (which is accessible afterremoving the frame) shall not be adjusted! Itdesigned to adjusted the zero point in the factoryand can not be seen as the adjustment of thebasic brightness in conventional dimmers

1.5.2 Dimmer with/for touch operation1.5.2.1 TRONIC- touch dimmer (315 W)The TRONIC-touch dimmer operates by meansof the principle of the TRONIC-dimmer describedin chapter 1.5.1.1. However it is not operated bya rotary potentiometer, but by a push button. Ashort touch switches-on or off the lamps, a longtouch causes continuos dimming.

Because there is no turn potentiometer offered inthis device, the internal timing stage is notdesigned by a monoflop, as it is described inchapter 1.5.1.1. A control IC generates pulses ofdifferent positions depending from the pushbutton operation time and the pulses aretransformed to a constant DC voltage. Thisconstant DC voltage depending on the position ofthe pulses, is compared by the device with avoltage ramp controlled by the mains, seefollowing figure.

U

U

U

t

t

t

DC voltage adjustableby the push button funct.

MOSFET on off on off

Mainsvoltage

Internal procedure

loadvoltage

Figure: Operating principle TRONIC-touch dimmer

If the amount of the voltage ramp is zero, theMOSFET is switched-on. If the amount of thevoltage ramp is equal to the amount of thegenerated DC voltage the MOSFET is switched-off again. However, the user does not recognizethe differences of the TRONIC-dimmer and theTRONIC-touch dimmer.

Because the device contains a memory function,the switching-on onto max. brightness or onto thepreviously set brightness can be selected by aswitch in the mounting plate of the flush mountedhousing. So a previously chosen light scene canbe immediately called again.Installations with several operating points can berealized by means of extension units. These arepush buttons, which connects the mains voltageto the extension input "1" of the TRONIC touchdimmer, when the push button is pushed.

The TRONIC touch dimmer analyses this pulseand responds with the corresponding switch ordimming procedures. Extension units contain thesame amount of function as the push button ofthe dimmer itself.

Commercially used push buttons or extensionunits of the type A from the switch program andremote IR-push buttons with permanent pulsemay be used as extension units.

Chap.: 1.5 Page: 4

1.5.2.2 TRONIC-recessed dimmer (700 W)We can realize circuits with TRONIC-dimmers upto a connected power of maximum 315 W in aflush-box due to the generated heat. TheTRONIC-recessed dimmer was designed to beable to dimm power up to 700W with one device.The device has a built-in housing that is knownfrom the TRONIC-transformers and in theinstallation, it is laid to the transformers into thefalse ceiling or it is surface mounted. Theoperation of the TRONIC-recessed dimmer isrealized by the flush mounting extensions, whichhave been mentioned in the description of theTRONIC-touch dimmer.

Short touch switch-on or off the connectedlamps, long touches cause continuos dimming ofthe lamps.

Additionally to the terminals phase, load andextension, the TRONIC-recessed dimmercontains four further terminals, which are markedas "control wires for Power boosters".

Memory

ON OFF1

L N

L

Controlwiresforpowerboosters

Figure: Circuit TRONIC recessed dimmer

These are output terminals that are set to thepotential of the load terminal, however they cannot carry high currents. The load is not allowed tobe connected directly, the device is thenoverloaded. These four terminals serve for theconnection of the power boosters, since these willload the dimmer output only with a small power(less than 1 W).

Also the TRONIC-recessed dimmer contains aselectable memory function. The correspondingmemory switch is mounted in the cover of thehousing, see figure Circuit TRONIC-recesseddimmer.

1.5.3 Remote control dimmer1.5.3.1 IR-TRONIC-touch dimmer (315 W)A special variant of the TRONIC touch dimmer,described in chapter 1.5.2.1, is the IR TRONICtouch dimmer. It contains the same amount offunctions, however a modified mounting plate,

which is suitable to plug-in the IR receiver. Bythat means, after plugging-in the IR-receiver, itcan be remote operated with the IR handheldtransmitter as well as with the push buttonintegrated in the IR-receiver. The operation isalso possible with all kinds of extensions,mentioned in chapter 1.5.2.1. Since using thisdevice, the dimmer and the IR-receiver have tobe supplied with voltage, a neutral wireconnection is required. Please note this, wheninstalling the cables and wires.

1.5.4 Power extension1.5.4.1 TRONIC-recessed Power booster

(700 W)All mentioned phase-cut-off dimmers (TRONIC-dimmer, TRONIC-touch dimmer, IR-TRONIC-touch dimmer, TRONIC-recessed dimmer) areable to be extended at each 700W by means ofthe use of TRONIC recessed Power booster!Also this TRONIC- recessed Power booster issuitable for laying into false ceilings or forsurface mounting.

In order to supply the dimming power of 700W,the power booster contains an own connectionfor phase and neutral conductor, as shown in thefollowing figure.

L

N

TRONIC-Dimmer TRONIC-recessedPower booster

N

N

max.315 W max.700 W

L

1

Figure: Circuit TRONIC-recessed Power booster

Because the dimmer and the power booster canoperate in synchronism, it is strongly required toconnect both devices to one phase. The output ofthe dimmer being amplified must be connectedto the control terminal "1". This control terminal"1" is high-resistive and loads the dimmer beingcontrolled only with less than 1W.

Chap.: 1.5 Page: 5

The power booster acts onto switching edges ofthe controlling dimmer by a correspondingregulation of its power output. The power that isnecessary for this is taken from the mains. Infigure Circuit TRONIC-recessed Power boosterthe circuit is shown once more.

Because of the very small load of the dimmer bythe power extensions, it is not possible toconnect only Power boosters to the dimmerThe rule is: At first load the dimmer with a fullyloaded TRONIC-transformer, then connect thePower boosters. Up to 10 power booster may beconnected to each TRONIC dimmer type.

If we have a look on the circuit, the blockstructure can be identified in following figure:

Temp.

Short circuitprotection

Supplyvoltage

N

LTemperature

monitoring 2 FET-Transistors

i

Controlelectronic

1 Decoupling

N

Figure: Principle circuit of the TRONIC-recessed Power booster

The block "Voltage supply" shows the supplyvoltage that is required for the operation of theelectronic independently on the sine wave of themains. In the block "Decoupling" the outputsignal of the dimmer is taken nearly withoutpower, it is attenuated and then it is led to the"Control electronic" for evaluation. The controlelectronic turns on one of the field effecttransistors according to the applied mains halfwave and sets the power output to the switchingstate, which is also applied to the control input"1".

The temperature of the transistors is monitoredby a temperature switch, which switches-off thesupply voltage of the electronic, if a heat limit isexceeded and so the output of the device isblocked, until it is cooled down.

If the current through the transistors exceeds theset values, the "short circuit protection" identifiesit. The control electronic is blocked, thetransistors are no more turned on and the outputof the device is blocked. With that the behaviour

of the device is effective as described in chapter1.5.3.

When required, the TRONIC-recessedtransformer can be switched-off, not dependingon the dimmer. Then a switch (normally closedcontact) has to be installed in the control wirefrom the dimmer to the Power booster, thatmeans before input "1" of the Power booster. If itis opened, the Power booster does not get acontrol signal from the dimmer and the output ofthe power booster is switched-off reliably.

1.5.5 Protection functions of TRONIC-dimmer

Each system component of the TRONIC-lightcontrol system described in the chapter 1.5.1. -1.5.4. contains protection functions, which arerealized by electronic and have been yetpresented partly in block circuits:

The electronic short circuit protection identifiesfrom approx. twice the rated current on , that ashort circuit has occurred in the load circuit andturns off the output in some microseconds, that isfaster than all wire fuses. If the short circuit issolved within 7 seconds, the dimmer or thePower booster will restart automatically. Thedevices will be permanently switched-off atlonger short circuit times. After solving the shortcircuit the dimmer must be switched-off and on,to operate again.

All devices contain a temperature switch. If thedanger of overheating occurs, the temperatureswitch turns off the device until it cools down.Then the re-switching-on is automatically active.By means of this features you are protectedagainst defects that will create overtemperatureand overload.

Chap.: 1.5 Page: 6

TRONIC - recessed dimmer,

Touch dimmer

Extension

Type A

IR-push but.

Perman. pulse.

IR-TRONIC--

Touch dimmer

TRONIC -Trans

TRONIC-

Dimmer

Power Booster 700W

flush area surface mounting area

TRONIC - Light control system for LV-halogen lamps

max.7315 W

to further power boosters 700 W

to further TRONIC transformersTRONIC - recessed-

700W

alternatively only

315 W - dimmer

TRONIC-

TRONIC -Trans

TRONIC -Trans

TRONIC -Trans

TRONIC -Trans

max.7700 W

TRONIC -Trans

Power Booster 700W

TRONIC - recessed-to further TRONIC transformers

to further TRONIC transformers

TRONIC -Trans

Power Booster 700W

to further power boosters 700 W

to further TRONIC transformersTRONIC - recessed-

TRONIC -Trans

TRONIC -Trans

TRONIC -Trans

TRONIC -Trans

TRONIC -Trans

Power Booster 700W

TRONIC - recessed-

to further TRONIC transformers

to further TRONIC transformers

Extension

Type A

IR-push but.

Perman. pulse.

Extension

Type A

IR-push but.

Perman. pulse.

Figure: Presentation of the TRONIC-light control system

1.5.6. TRONIC-Light control systemIf also a TRONIC-dimmer extension should beremote controlled, instead of a mechanical pushbutton an IR push button with permanent pulsecan be installed. It transforms at the same timethe push button operation into 230 V outputsignals and so it takes the function of themechanical extension.

By means of the described TRONIC-dimmer, theTRONIC- recessed Power booster, themechanical extensions and the IR-push buttonwith permanent pulse, which form together theTRONIC light control system, complex lightcontrol system can be installed individually.7700W (that means one TRONIC recesseddimmer with 10 TRONIC recessed powerbooster) are able to be controlled by oneoperating device. The figure Presentation of theTRONIC-light control system shows the possiblecombinations.

Installing the devices, you have to pay attentionthat the dimmer and the following power boostersare connected to one phase. The correctinstallation can be taken from the following wiringdiagrams.

Because you are able to connect a maximumpower of 3680 W (16 A x 230 V = 3680 W) to 16A miniature circuit breaker (MCB), a secondMCB has to be installed, if this limit is exceeded.

Installing a TRONIC-light control system,however both protection circuits are connected. Ifonly one MCB is opened, the load is notconsequently free of voltage, as it is seen in thefigure MCBs in the Light control systemThis is the reason, that the MCBs used forTRONIC light control system must be replacedby a multiple MCB or must be coupled by acommon operating bow to ensure a switchingfree of all poles.

Please take note of the technical connectionconditions of the regional power stations, if youinstall a TRONIC-Light control system. There arelimitations for the connection of the maximumpower without any application for devices perphase using phase-cut-on or phase-cut-off

Chap.: 1.5 Page: 7

I >I >

L1L2L3N

N NL3 L3

max.16Amax.16A

2 pole MCB

max. 3680 W max. 3680 W

TRONIC-dimmer

TRONIC-transformerTRONIC-recessed Powerbooster

per 16 a MCB per 16A MCB

TRONIC-transformer TRONIC-transformer

Figure: MCBs in the TRONIC-Light control system

1.5.7 Instructions for installationTRONIC-dimmers and TRONIC-Power boostersare designed to be used with TRONIC-transformers. The result is an optimum tuning.We guarantee apart from the dimming withoutproblems the radio frequency suppression andthe protection against spikes. Normally it is alsopossible to connect electronic transformers fromother manufacturers. You have to check in eachsingle case, if you comply with the three features(Dimming, radio frequency suppression,protection against mains spikes). Please, ask us.

Other manufacturers also give information. Up tonow our experiences show, that manytransformers are able to be dimmed. Theoperation without humming is impressing. And donot care about a fuse change! The features ofthis device are shouting for the usage as adimmer for incandescent lamps. Howeverinductive loads may not be connected. The zeropoint detection is not guaranteed because of thephase shift between voltage and current. Thelight flickering would be the result.

Chap.: 1.5 Page: 8

Installation of UP TRONIC-dimmer (flush):

The installation rules for the UP TRONIC-dimmer(flush) and for the phase-cut-on dimmer issimilar:

− Use in 2-way or 4-way circuits (TRONIC-dimmer) or the use of extensions (TRONIC-touch dimmer or IR-touch dimmer) is possible

− Mounting in standard flush-box− Rated power in an ambient temperature of

25°C, installation in a solid stone or plasterwall, dimmer is installed as a single device

If the conditions are different the normalinformation of power reduction is applicable:

− -10 % per 5°C exceeding the ambient temperature of 25°C

− -15 % for installation in wooden, false or hollow walls

− -10 % for external devices in multiple combination with dimmers

− -20 % for internal devices in multiple combination with dimmers.

It is allowed to connect to one UP-TRONIC-dimmer:

− max. 2* 200 W TRONIC transformer− max. 3* 150 W TRONIC transformer− max. 3 105 W TRONIC transformer− max. 5* 70 W TRONIC transformer− max. 9 35 W TRONIC transformer*: however, the total lamp load may not

exceed 315W

− any standard incandescent lamp or halogenlamp up to a total power of 315 W

− max. 10 TRONIC-recessed Power booster

− Mixed operation of TRONIC transformers ofdifferent power or of TRONIC transformers with230 V incandescent lamp or halogen lamp up toa maximum of 315 W total power.

Installation of Recessed Dimmer:

The installation rules are applicable for theTRONIC-recessed dimmer 700 W and theTRONIC-recessed power booster as for theTRONIC-transformer:

Suitable for installations in false ceilings withminimum opening of Ø 63mm and surfacemounted applications.

It is allowed to connect to the recessed devices:

− max. 4** 200 W TRONIC transformer− max. 5** 150 W TRONIC transformer− max. 7** 105 W TRONIC transformer− max. 10 70 W TRONIC transformer− max. 20 35 W TRONIC transformer**: however, the total lamp load may not

exceed 315W

− any standard incandescent lamp or halogenlamp up to a total power of 700 W.

− Mixed operation of TRONIC-transformers ofdifferent power or of TRONIC-transformerswith 230 V incandescent lamp or halogenlamp up to a maximum of 700 W total power.

The devices are operating up to an ambienttemperature ta = max. 45 °C. The housingtemperature tc = max 70 °C is reached in thiscase. The devices switch-off, if the temperaturesare essentially exceeded, since overtemperatureleads to device defects.

Wiring plans of the TRONIC-Light controlsystem can be taken from the following pages.

Chap.: 1.5 Page: 9

L

N

to further

extensions

to further TRONIC-recessed Power booster

L 1 N L LN N

3 core 250 V cable,select the cross sectionaccording to the total load ofallpower boosters.(perhaps distributeon the cables)

up to 60 W : 2x1.0mm²up to 105 W: 2x1.5mm²up to 150 W: 2x2.5mm² > 150 W:entspr.aufteilen.

2x1.5 mm²

2x1.5 mm²

2x1.5 mm² 2x1.5 mm²

LV area

min60** W,max315 W

min100W,max700 WL

N

12 VTRONIC-trans.

to furtherTRONIC-transformers

2x1.5 mm²

LN

L

N

1

NNTRONIC-

recessedPower booster

11

ExtensionTypeA

* TRONIC*-touch dimmer

If aTRONIC-dimmer with push/changeswitch is installed,replace the extensions by a 2-wayor4-way switch!

*:

L

N

12 VTRONIC-trans.

L

N

12 VTRONIC-trans.

L

N

12 VTRONIC-trans.

to furtherTRONIC-transformers

Minimum load installingTRONIC-recessed power booster

**:

Figure: Wiring diagram of the TRONIC Light control system with UP TRONIC-dimmer (flush)

min60** W,max700 W

L

N

to further

extensions

L 1 N L LN N

3 core 250 V cable,select the cross sectionaccording to the total loadof all power boosters(perhaps distribute oncables) and protect by an-pole MCB

up to 60 W : 2x1,0mm²up to 105 W: 2x1,5mm²up to 150 W: 2x2,5mm² > 150 W:entspr.aufteilen.

2x1.5 mm²

2x1.5 mm²

2x1.5 mm²

2x1.5 mm²

LV area

ExtensionType A

3x1.5 mm²

LN

min100 W,max700 W

4 terminals only for the furtherTRONIC recessed Power boostersto terminal "1"

No connectionof further TRONICtransformers possible!

N1

TRONIC-

recessed Power

booster

1

TRONIC-recesseddimmer

1

L

N

1

NN

TRONICrecessedpower booster

L

Minimum load connectingTRONIC-recessed Power boosters

L

N

12 VTRONIC-trans.

L

N

12 VTRONIC-trans.

L

N

12 VTRONIC-trans.

L

N

12 VTRONIC-trans.

to further TRONIC-

recessed Power boosters

to further

TRONIC-transformers

to furtherTRONIC-trans. **:

Figure: Wiring diagram of the TRONIC Light control system with TRONIC-recessed dimmer

Chap.: 1.6 Page: 1

Current source

Electronic for controlling thelamps

+

-

L NEVG

+

-

I

U

ST

ST

Electronicpotentiometer

LN

230 V ~

Figure: Principle function of the 1-10V interface

1.6 Electronic potentiometer for10 V control input

In the lighting technology electronic ballasts areincreasingly used for the operation of lamps (i.e.fluorescent lamps), which are equipped with an1-10V control input.These electronic ballasts measure the voltageapplied to the 10V control input, which lies in therange of approx. 1 - 10 V (because of that thiscontrol is also called 1-10 V interface). It sets thecorresponding brightness of the lamps,

If the 10V control inputs of several electronicballasts are connected by means of one controlwire, the voltage of the 10V control inputs can beadjusted. So the brightness of all lamps can beset by means of one potentiometer at one centralplace. Larger lighting installation can be realizedby that means.

The Electronic potentiometer for 10 V controlinput serves both for switching-on and -off themains voltage of the electronic ballast and for theadjustment of the control voltage without troubles

at the 10 V control input of the electronic ballast.It is analogously designed to the well-knowndimmer construction with push button and rotaryknob and can be installed in the standard flushswitch box.

1.6.1 Principle operationElectronic ballasts with 10 V control input controlthe brightness of the connected lamps (i.e.fluorescent lamps) depending on the voltageapplied to control input UST (see figure Principlefunction of the 1-10V interface).

For it, the electronic ballast supplies a constantcurrent IST from the control input „+“ , which isflowing across the electronic potentiometer to thecontrol input „-“ of the electronic ballast.

The voltage UST, which is then set at the controlinput at „+“ and „-“ of the electronic ballast, is indirect proportion to the resistance of theelectronic potentiometer.

+

-

Electronicpotentiometer

LN

230 V ~

LN Electronic

ballast 1+-

LN

+-

Furtherballasts

I

UST2

ST

IST1

UST

IST IST1 IST2= + + ...

Control wire

Mains wire

Electronicballast 2

Figure: Wiring of the Electronic potentiometer

Chap.: 1.6 Page: 2

If more than one electronic ballast should becontrolled simultaneously, only the 10V controlinputs are connected in parallel by means of onecontrol wire (see figure: Wiring of the Electronicpotentiometer). The sum of all constant currentsfrom the 10 V control inputs I STΣ = IST1 + IST2 + ....are flowing through the Electronic potentiometer.

So a common UST is set for all electronic ballast.By means of an exponential characteristic of thepotentiometer it is achieved, that the angleposition of the rotary knob will slightly change tocertain brightness values, if the current I STthrough the Electronic potentiometer is changedby, e.g.

− Switching of further electronic ballasts− Retrofitting with other types of electronic

ballasts− or other measures

The maximum number of electronic ballast thatcan be controlled simultaneously is determinedby the switching capacity of the mains switch andby the maximum allowed current flowing throughthe Electronic potentiometer (see 1.6.3. Circuitdimension).

Since according to the VDE requirements, thedark position may not be mixed up with themains disconnection of the electronic ballast, aminimum brightness is adjusted by means of atrimmer in the Electronic potentiometer after theinstallation of the lights. This brightness must bewell visible by the human eye. If you areadjusting the minimum brightness, the rotaryknob has to be fixed on its left limitation (seefigure Electronic potentiometer).

In case of an installation fault, mains voltagecould be applied to the control inputs „+“ and„-“ and the fine-wire fuse will trip.

1.6.2 Installation rulesIt is insignificant to the control function, if theconnected electronic ballasts are designed forthe operation of either one or two fluorescentlamps.

The control behaviour of the electronic ballastdepends on the manufacturer and the fluorescentlamps show a different behaviour dependingfrom the type and the manufacturer. So, pleasenote the following installation rules to achieve anoptimum continuos firing and dimming behaviourof all connected lamps

+ -

Fine-wire fuse, type F 500 H 250

Adjustment of the minimum brightness

Turn potentiometer with push switch

Figure: Electronic potentiometer

1. Use only electronic ballasts of one manufac-turer.

2. Use only electronic ballasts with a uniquepower, e.g. 1 x 36 W or 2 x 36 W or 1 x 58 Wor 2 x 58 W)

3. Use only fluorescent lamps of one manufac-turer and one type.

The 10 V control wire is galvanically separatedfrom the mains and is not allowed to be wired toL and N.

Information:The control function of the Electronicpotentiometer is not supplied by the mainsterminals. Because of this reason, it is possible toswitch the supply of the electronic ballast bymeans of other electrical equipment, e.g.separate 2-way circuits. The Electronicpotentiometer is then only used for theadjustment of the control wire. In this case theterminals L and N of the Electronic potentiometerare not connected.

Chap.: 1.6 Page: 3

1.6.3 Circuit dimensionUnfortunately the amount of the constantcurrents IST supplied by the control inputs isdifferent. . Each manufacturer offers Electronicballasts with different current. Here are twoexamples:

IST per HELVAR ballast: max. 2,0 mAIST per SIEMENS ballast: max. 0,8 mA

As the Electronic potentiometer can carry controlcurrents ISTΣ up to 40 mA, it possible to controlsimultaneously

20 HELVAR ballasts50 SIEMENS ballasts

But you have to ensure, that the maximumswitching capacity of the mains switch in theElectronic potentiometer of 1380 VA (6A) will notexceed. It can be tested by adding the power ofall connected lamps and then the total power ismultiplied by the factor 1.2, regarding the powerlosses of the electronic ballast and others. If theresulting total power exceeds 1380 VA, the mainsvoltage of the electronic ballasts must beswitched with a separate relay, which is specifiedfor the corresponding switching capacity.

1.6.4 Behaviour in case of installation faultsExchanging the mains terminals „↑" and „↓" ofthe Electronic potentiometer is insignificant, thefunction becomes still effective.

Exchanging the control outputs „+“ and „-“ of theElectronic potentiometer, the lamps will remain inoff-position or will shine very dark. Thebrightness can not be adjusted, however defectswill not appear.

Exchanging the mains inputs „↑" and „↓" with thecontrol inputs „+“ and „-“ will damage theElectronic potentiometer. A danger of fire isavoided by the tripping of the fine-wire fuse.

1.6.5 Technical data(The technical data have been up-to-date at thetime publishing the chapters, but there might bechanges in the meantime to follow the technicalprogress. This influences the products, and slightdifferences in the data may occur. The bindingtechnical data can be taken from the manualdelivered with the product.)

max. control voltage UST max: 12 Vmin. control voltage UST min: 0,7 Vmax. control current ISTΣ: 40 mAmax. switching capacityof the mains switch: 1380 VA ( 6 A)Fine-wire fuse: F 500 H 250

Chap.: 1.7 Page: 1

1 2 3 4 8

Keyboard Transmit IC455 kHzOscillator

Voltage supply(Battery)

Transmitting diodesA

BCD

H

8foldgroupswitch

Key driver

Key sensor

Figure: Principle circuit of IR-transmitter

1.7 Additional devices of the IR-remote control system

1.7.1 IR-handheld transmitterThe above figure shows the principle circuit ofthe 8channel handheld transmitter with agroup switch.

Each key in the keyboard is fixed to a signal bymeans of the IC output (called key driver). Whena key of the keyboard is pressed, this signal istransferred to the IC input (called key sensor).The use of the key sensor input is depending onthe position of the 8fold group switch. At eachkey stroke the transmit IC identifies, which keywas pressed and knows the position of the 8foldgroup switch. The transmit IC then selects thetelegram corresponding to the key stroke and tothe switch position and the telegram istransmitted by means of the transmitting diodes.

An oscillator circuit serves for the clockgeneration of the transmit IC, which is oscillatingat 455 kHz. All pulses and breaks of a telegramare derived from this oscillation, as it is describedin the chapter "The coding system"

4 batteries, type 1,5 V Micro, serve for thevoltage supply of the handheld transmitter. Theycan be inserted into the back of the transmitterafter removing the battery cover.

In order to save the battery energy, the electronicfalls into a standby mode, if no key is pressed.Only a very small current is required in thatmode. So an additional on-off-switch iscancelled.

It is known, that switch and dimming commandare different because of the differently longoperation of the push button. The handheldtransmitter must be able to generate the samecommands. So it must be able to create shortand long signals. The transmission of a telegramtakes only a time of approx. 60-90 ms, as it isdescribed in chapter 1.2.5.4. To achieve therequired signal length, the telegrams of the keyoperation duration are repeated frequently. Thereceiver must be able to win back an equivalentcontinuos operation signal from this telegramsequence.

If the IR-receiver, described in chapter 1.7.3, willbe used, the 8fold group switch is to set onposition "A". In this position only the address bitA3 to A5 are set in a way (see figure Completetelegram in chapter 1.2.5.4), the devicesprovided with IR-receivers will respond.

The base of the 4channel handheld transmitteris the Principle circuit of IR-transmitter. The 8foldgroup switch is not available, you can imaginethat the output of the keyboard is permanentlyfixed with the transmit IC's input A. The keyboardis designed only with the keys 1 to 4. The4channel handheld transmitter can only make adistinction among 4 keys and sends only 4different telegrams. But in many applications thisis still sufficient.

Chap.: 1.7 Page: 2

1.7.2 IR-wall transmitterThe electronic circuit of the wall transmitter isnearly similar to the circuit of the 4channelhandheld transmitter. Thus, the Principle circuit ofthe IR-transmitter is also effective, but with minorchanges:

− The 8fold group switch is cancelled, group A isfixed permanently.

− The keyboard contains the keys 1 to 4.− Not 2, but 4 transmitting diodes are

transmitting the telegram.

The wall transmitter was designed to operate thereceiver in the ceiling area. Thus, the radiated IR-light must reach a large area of the ceiling, seenfrom the mounting place of the wall transmitter.The 4 transmitting diodes are mounted in smallangle to one another and upwards to reach amaximum radiation angle. The geometricalrelations of the mounting place of the transmitter,the radiation angle IR-light and the mountingplace of the receiver can be taken from thefollowing picture:

A1 45°

40°

A2

Figure: IR-wall transmitter radiation

You should pay attention, that the distancebetween the mounting place of the receiver andthe wall of the transmitter (A2) is higher than thedistance between the mounting place of thereceiver and the ceiling (A1), because then the IR-receiver is not installed in the badly radiated areaabove the wall transmitter.

The current supply is ensured by means of a 9Vblock battery.

1.7.3 IR-receiver for UP devices (flush mounting)

Attached key

S1 OUT

Pre-amplifier

Current supplyReset circuit

Decoder

IC

(Processor)

1 MHzOscillator

Reiceiving diodes

IC

Figure: Principle circuit of an IR-receiver

The IR receiving diodes are operating in reversedirection, as it is shown in the figure Principlecircuit of an IR-receiver. A very small leakagecurrent is flowing through the diode in thedarkness, the so-called dark current. When IR-light hits the diode, it operates like a currentsource and supplies the following circuit withcurrent. This feature is called "photo electriceffect" or in short words: photo-effect. The diodegenerates current deviations, which correspond tothe intensity of the IR-light

In that way, the next amplifier receives currentpulses that are in direct proportion to the arrivinglight. The preamplifier filters the 455 kHz carrierfrequency and offers the telegram to its outputwithout the carrier frequency. The intensity of thearriving 455 kHz signals vary, because it dependson the transmission distance and on the radiationangle. The preamplifier regulates the signal ontoan amplitude of 4-5 V and transfers the telegramto the decoder. Now the telegram has an electricrepresentation. If only one 455 kHz pulse is lost oradded on the way to the preamplifier, at the outputof the preamplifier the telegram is stronglydamaged. The decoder recognizes a faultytelegram and it will not be evaluated.

The decoder is a microprocessor with 1 MHzclock. The microprocessor senses the telegramsupplied by the pre-amplifier, reads all 12 bit ofthe telegram, decodes the transmitted addressand switches the decoder output into the activemode, corresponding to the address.

The decoder contains 8 outputs and it is able todistinguish 8 different telegrams that have adifference in the bit A2-A0. It evaluates theaddress and sets one output.

Chap.: 1.7 Page: 3

The channel number of the receiver was set at theinstallation of the receiver. The connected loadsshould respond to this channel. For this purpose,the desired decoder output is switched to the loadby means of the select switch S1 (see figurePrinciple circuit of an IR-receiver). The channelnumber corresponds to the key number of thetransmitter. Thus it is ensured, that a load getsonly a signal, if the corresponding key is pressed.

If the transmit key is pressed, the switchcommand appears with a maximum delay of 100ms at the receiver output because the completetelegram must be transmitted. This short delay isnot noticed in current practice.

To be able to transmit also dimming commands,after the receipt of a telegram the decoder outputis set as long as a next telegram is evaluated andthis sets the decoder output furthermore. If nomore telegrams with the same contents arearriving, the decoder output is reset. So, an outputsignal is generated which is continuos and inproportion to the key stroke of the transmitter. It isevaluated by means of the connected load.

The receiver circuit is assembled in a unit andthus it can be used as a remote attachment forseveral full-electronic installation devices. It hasalways the same construction and differentfunctions.

Chap.: 2.1 Page: 1

2. Observer

2.1 General fundamentalsPassive infra-red motion detectors become moreand more an element of a good electric installa-tion in the private and commercial area.

Motion detectors belong to the fully automaticinstallation devices, that means light sources willbe switched-on, if a person enters the detectionfield and it will be switched-off again, if a personleaves the detection field (after a pre-set delaytime). This switching-on demand respectively aconvenient switching helps to save current.There is an essential benefit, if rooms areentered very often and for a short time. Thepossibilities of application are nearly unlimited:

− Switching on demand in passages, cellars, onlofts,

− backyards, garage drives, entrance areas− on terraces− in stockrooms− on parking places and garages− to achieve light effects in entrance halls and

exhibitions− Lighting of stairwells− Access protection− Detection of persons in elevators

The body heat of a person which is moving in thesurveillance field is detected as a heatdifference. The infra-red sensors send a switchpulse to the electronic, a power stage connectedafterwards closes the load circuit and switches-onthe installed consuming device.

2.1.1 Light and sensorExplanation of the principle:Heat radiation that triggers a surveillanceprocess, is in the infra-red range of the wavespectrum.The human body emits heat radiation in thisrange. Lamps (incandescent lamps, halogenlamps and discharging lamps) are designed toemit radiation in the visible range about 0.555µm, however they are also emitting an essentialpart of their radiation in the IR range.

The infra-red spectrum starts above the visiblelight, from 0.780 µm on. The wave length of thisIR radiation is dependent on the temperature ofthe body. The heat radiation of the human beinghas its maximum in the infra-red range between9 and 10 µm.

10 100 10001

300 K

3000 K

Infraredvisible

Wave length / µm

Heatradiation-intensity /Kelvin

Figure: Intensity of the heat radiation

This fact is used to detect persons by means ofpyroelectric IR-detectors that have a highsensivity at the infra-red long-wave range. Theinfra-red radiation behaves similarly to the visiblelight. It is able to be reflected and focused bylens.

Lithium-tantalite crystals are the basis of such IRdetectors. These crystals generate an electricvoltage in case of heat changes (positive ornegative temperature change).

The voltage generated by the crystals is in therange of some µV (µV = millionth volt) anddepends on following conditions:− The intensity of the heat source (temperature

and amount)− The environment media (temperature,

different moisture)− The distance between the heat source and the

IR sensor− The moving motion and the moving direction

of the heat source− The sensivity of the PIR element (behaviour

like a band-pass filter dependent on thefrequency with a maximum at approx. 0.1 Hz)

To suppress influences from the environment,two crystals in the sensor are connected anti-parallel and unwanted switching is avoided.

D

S

G

optical filter

Gateresistor

FET

Sensorcrystals

Sensor housing

Figure: Construction of a sensor

Chap.: 2.1 Page: 2

When heat radiation hits the crystals, one crystalgenerates a positive and one crystal generates anegative voltage pulse. If heat changes occur atthe same time and with the same intensity, theydo not trigger a detection process, because theydelete one another. Thus, the triggering isimpossible by means of heat changes of theenvironment.

In case of fast moves the process is different.The lithiumtantalat crystals generate their pulseswith a delay time corresponding to the createdheat change. Both pulses are added to analternating size with a high signal amplitude.This output signal is in proportion to the heatchange, and it is used to trigger the detectionprocess in the observers.

2.1.2 Construction of observersA metal housing contains the sensor crystals,which is fixed to ground potential. Thus, thecrystals are protected against electrostaticdischarge.

The sensor element is covered by means of filterglass to reduce the surveillance area. This opticalfilter limits the analysed range to the mediuminfra-red of 7-14 µm. A lens system is used in theobserver to focus the IR energy on the sensorarea. The lens system is called "Fresnel-lens"adapted from the inventor. They are formed to alens group to get a wide angle(70°,110°,180°,240°) and to survey in differentlevels.

The lens system has the task to concentrate thearriving heat radiation to the PIR-element bymeans of focusing. A sufficient sensivity is thenachieved.

Sensor element Lens

Sensor crystals

Optical filter

Figure: Ray focusing

A surveillance field is designed which is detectedby an enormous number of surveillance rays(surveillance fingers). The number of rays andthe density of the detection is a direct feature ofthe response sensivity and of the quality of thePIR observer.

Figure: Surveillance rays

The construction of the PIR-sensor / lens systemthat is used in surface mounting observers iscovered by a protective foil. This foil is glued withthe observer housing to be waterproof and theelectronic is completely sealed against moisture.These observers are designed for a roughoutdoor use and are weatherproof. They areaccording to protection degree IP 55 (splashwater protected). A small air gap between theprotective foil and the lens system prevents thesteaming of the lens by means of condensation.

Lens system

Protectivefoil

Figure: Weatherproof observer

Further more the protective foil is designed asan UV-filter for the lens system, as UV-light maydestroy the material of the lens system if it isshined intensively for a long time. So the lenssystem would not be transparent for the IR-radiation.

2.1.3 Dependence on the range by means ofphysical factors

The range and so the area of the surveillancefield of a PIR motion detector depends onvarious physical factors.The change of one of these factors results inreduction or even enlarging of the range in somecases. Thus, it is of great importance beforeinstallation, that you have an idea about the areathat should be detected. Please, think about themost suitable observers (70°, 110°, 180° or240°), select the fitting place and note thefollowing physical conditions.

Chap.: 2.1 Page: 3

2.1.3.1 Fitting height, sensor inclination, terrain

The PIR motion detectors "watch" through theoptical lens from the fitting place towards thebottom.

The longest ray hit the ground

− at given fitting height− not inclined sensor head− flat terrain

at the rated range. This so-defined range ispublished in the technical documentations ofobservers.

Deviations from the above listed parameters leadto a change of the range:

Parameter Rangehigher lower

Fitting height ↑ XFitting height ↓ XSensor turned up XSensor turned down XFalling terrain XSteep terrain X

2.1.3.2 Motion directionThe observer electronic detects a change ofheat, when entering or leaving the surveillanceray.In the worst case a person moves directly ontothe observer in one surveillance ray (radialmotion direction). Doing this, only minimumvoltage pulses are generated due to the smalltemperature changes. This does not lead to adetection in each case and the lamps are notswitched-on.In the figure a person moves onto the observer inthe surveillance ray (1). You have to calculate arange reduction by means of this motiondirection.

2.1.

Figure: Worst case of motion direction

The optimum motion direction is a crosswisemotion to the observer (tangential motiondirection).

The sensors transfer maximum voltage pulses tothe electronic, which ensures the detection of themotion.In the figure a person moves from thesurveillance ray (1) to the surveillance ray (2). Aperson is detected, when he is leaving the ray (1)and when he is entering the ray (2).

2.1.

Figure: Best case of motion direction

2.1.3.3 Detection at the range limitsAt first a person is detected at the feet, if heenters a surveillance field due to the opticaladjustment of the surveillance rays. Thetemperature difference between the body and theenvironment is an essential term to achieve agood detection. If the temperature differenceentering the surveillance field has no sufficientamount, the person has to walk closer toobserver. That means, the range is reduced.

2.1.3.4 Environmental influences

Heat radiation

Fog

Snow

Rain

Figure: Reduction of the heat energy

The human heat radiation is transmitted to thesensor using the media air. So environmentalinfluences as, e.g. fog, snow or rain (absorptionof the heat radiation) will affect the range. Inaddition, on cold days heat-isolated clothes areworn and thus the radiated heat energy isessentially reduced.By means of this influences, the heat radiation isworse transmitted to the sensor, the range isreduced.

Chap.: 2.1 Page: 4

2.1.3.5 Summary:

Depending on− the inclination of the sensor head− the terrain (steep or flat)− the fitting height− the current temperature of the person

(depending on the clothes)− the current ground temperature in the

surveillance field

− the current ground moisture (rain, snow, fog)− the motion direction of the person

the active range is determined for the givenapplication.

In the figure you can see a real observerapplication with reduced and increased ranges:

24 °CRated range

Active range

Lawn 19 °CFallingterrain

Unfavourable motion direction

Favourablemotion direction

Stone plates or asphalt24 °C

Rated fitting heightSensor head not tilt

Lawn 16 °C

Figure: Real installation of observers

2.1.4 Function of the observerThe observer has the task to translate a detectedmotion into a switch command.

Following requirements are present to realize aswitching:− in case of detection, as well as in the pre-set

delay time, the "On-state" shall be stored.− the switching-on shall depend on the ambient

brightness. This is achieved by an integratedtwilight switch.

− the light shall be able to be switched manually

In most cases the detected motion has to beconverted to a switching-on a light. So the PIRsignal has to be amplified to control a powerswitch (relay or triac).

While switching-on, the consumers are suppliedwith mains voltage by means of the powerswitch.The load contact of a relay, used in high-qualityobservers, is built of material that is resistantagainst burn-up. Contact material is used, e.g.silver-tin-oxide alloys. High currents can be

switched by means of such contact material. Ahigh resistance is guaranteed against shortcircuits in the connected consumers.

Another requirement to a powerful PIR observeris, light should only be switched-on, if thebrightness is falling below a minimum value(twilight switch).

The measured quantity of the brightness is theilluminance in lux. The dependence of the switchprocess on the ambient brightness is realized bymeans of a light depending resistor (LDR). Sucha photo-resistor is high-resistive in the non-illuminated state. Its so-called dark resistance isup to some megaohms. If the illuminationincreases, the electric resistance is falling to1/1000 of the dark resistance.

By means of electronic components the currentthrough this resistor is measured and it iscompared with the pre-set desired value of thetwilight switch (lux tuner). If the desired value isreached or exceeded, the motion detector isactive and a motion is converted into a "switch-on the light".

Chap.: 2.1 Page: 5

RMOHM

0

0,1

0,2

0,3

0,4

0,5

0,6

0,7

0,8

0,9

1,0

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100E

LUX

Figure: LDR characteristic

The range of regulation of the twilight switch isdesigned, that a switching at daylight and aswitching at the twilight is continuouslyadjustable. It is sensible to note, that the upperbrightness range (between 10-80 lux) supports awide range of regulation at the lux tuner.Brightness with values more than 80 lux appearat the daylight mode, so the twilight switch is notactive, then the light is switched independentlyon the brightness, if motion is detected.

The twilight switch of indoor observers (e.g. flushmounting observer) should be provided with anadditional sensivity delay (hysteresis). In theindoor area the flush-boxes are mounted in afitting height of approx. 1.1 m and so it mayhappen, that the brightness sensor gets dark bymeans of a shadow of a body who is movingacross. To avoid a switching in case of asufficient room illumination, an electronic delaytime was realized. It ignores short dark phasesand a faulty switching is extensively excluded.

The observers operate in a retriggering modeduring the switch-on process, that means eachnew motion in the surveillance area starts theswitch-on time again. Thus, the consumer staysin on-state for a pre-set time (potentiometertime), although the person has left thesurveillance field.

2.1.5 Electronic circuit, Principle of function

To get a better knowledge about the function of aPIR motion detector, the electronic circuit isshown by means of the flowing figure and in ablock structure:

ThresholddetectionAmplifier

Current supplyDetection ofmains failure

Switching stage( relay, triac)

230V AC

Lamp

Power unit

TIME

Sensor head

Timing stage

Release

Brightnesssensor

LUX

Brightnessadjustment

Sensivity(only in 240° device)

N

IR rays

Filter

N

PIR sensor

Switchindication

1 2 43

8

9

5

10

11

12

13

6

7

& >1&

Figure: Principle circuit

Chap.: 2.1 Page: 6

1. PIR sensor elements. The sensors generatean alternating voltage of some µV, when heatchanges have been detected.

2. Filter circuit. Slow processes are filtered.Unwanted switching is avoided by means oftemperature changes of the nature (e.g. leafmoved by wind)

3. The signal of the PIR sensor is amplified byoperation amplifiers for a further evaluation.

4. The threshold detection stage gives a definedHigh level to the output, if the limit isexceeded. Otherwise a Low level (lowvoltage) is given.

5. The brightness sensor is realized by means ofa light sensitive resistor. This componentchanges its resistance depending on thereceived light density.

6. The brightness is adjusted in the power unit. Ifthe brightness falls below the pre-set value,this component applies an H-level to the inputof the following AND gate.

7. AND logic. An H-level is only generated, if thebrightness is fallen below the pre-setminimum value Ü and the threshold value Ñhas exceeded a defined value.

8. OR logic. The OR logic is connected to themains failure

9. detection â and to the current supply 10 Thisenables

10. to switch the load circuit also, if no motionwas detected orthe minimum brightness wasnot reached ( manual operation). This stagegives a H-level (switch command) to theoutput, if a H-level is applied to â or á.

11. The input of the timing stage forms anotherAND gate. So a H from à and a H from therelease stage is required for starting thetiming stage. The timer is realized by meansof a 14stage frequency divider and sets theswitch-on time (time tuner) of the lamp load.

12. The release stage blocks the timing stage fora short time after the switching-off to suppressan oscillating before the next switching-on(locking time).

13. The switching stage closes the load circuit.The power switch is designed as a relay or asa triac .It is depending on the observer type.

2.1.6 Influence on the observer by means ofthe switched lampAs above described, PIR motion detectors switchelectrical consumer depending on the heat dif-ference in the surveillance field. In many caseslighting is switched. Lamps take the energy fromthe mains and, e.g. standard incandescentlamps, emit a high part of energy as heat. If sucha lamp is fitted in the surveillance field of theobserver, the observer can detect a negativechange of heat in the case of switching-off . Thelamp is cooling down at this moment and theobserver switches again.To avoid this, the observers are provided with alocking time. This locking time turns the deviceinto the inactive mode after a switching-off forapprox. 3 sec. Only after that time a motion canbe detected again. By means of this circuit aproblem of re-switching-on is extensivelyexcluded.

Observers, single devices or devices in parallel,that have not detected a motion ( in the figuredevice Ç), are not locked respectively thelocking time of 3 seconds is over.

2 1

Figure: Re-switching-on

If the lighting is switched-off, a new switching-oncan appear. The reason is, the lamps aredetected (cooling down and with that a heatchange appears) or the lamps heat is reflected orthe distance between the observer and the lampis too small.

Observers are provided with a twilight sensor.Thus, it is possible to switch the lamps dependingon the ambient temperature. In many cases aswitching of the lamps and a detection of themotion is only desired at the beginning of thetwilight. If in this case the light of the switchedlamp shines onto other observers, the brightnesssensor will detect a sufficient illuminance and thedevice does not evaluates the motion.

In the following figure the device Å is active, Çmeasures a sufficient ambient brightness and thedetected motions will not switch the lamp.

Chap.: 2.1 Page: 7

2 1

Figure: Brightness sensor and room light

2.1.7 Observer (Motion detector)suitable foralarm systems?

Passive infra-red motion detectors are suitablefor automatic switching-on and -off various lightsources and for switching on demand and forswitching for convenience.

As described in the above chapters, at first notthe human motion, but the heat change in thesurveillance field is detected. Sensors, beingsensitive on very small heat changes, are able todetect human motion high distance away (up to16 m). Because of the clothes, only some parts

of the body ( face and hands ) emit sufficientheat rays to trigger a switching-on. If we thinkabout that, we understand, those heat sourceswith small energy nearby also have to bedetected. Observers are able to trigger a circuit,if animals or warm and cold air currents enter thesurveillance field (heating, air-conditioning,ventilation etc.).Thus, observers as a component of an alarmsystem trigger in case of an unwanted detectionand a fault alarm would be occur.

Devices being suitable for alarm systems have acontact against sabotage. In case ofdisconnection, it turns the device on and analarm is set. Furthermore important features area protection against drilling and a VdS approval(Verein deutscher Sachversicherer) to integratean observer into an alarm system.We can summarize, that a PIR motion detector isable to frighten an 'undesired visitor' by means ofthe surprise light switching. But safety is notsupported, as it is required in combination withan alarm system.

Chap.: 2.2 Page: 1

2.2 Single observers for surface mounting

Single observers are devices that form acomplete unit. All required components are builtin one housing.Single devices contain a sensor head, (sensorcrystals, lens system) and an isolated power unit(power supply, operating elements, powerswitch).

The observer 70, 110, 180/10, 180/16 and 240are single devices for surface mounting.

2.2.1 Observer 70The Observer 70 is designed for mounting on aflat wall and contains an adjustment of the rangein 3 levels. This is realized by moving the sensorin relation to the lens. The 'surveillance rays'leave the Observer with a variable angle ofinclination.

Fresnel lens

ElectronicPIR sensor

minimum medium maximum

Mov

e di

rect

ion

range

Observer 70°

Figure: Principle of the range adjustment Observer 70

If moving, the housing snaps into three positionsnotches:

Notch top: maximum rangeNotch center: medium rangeNotch bottom: minimum range

N L

DISTANCE

max.

min.

Figure: Position notches in Observer 70Through this the maximum range can be adaptedindividually to the local conditions

The surveillance field is being separated into 5fan-shaped areas. If the Observer is mounted inheight of 2.40 m and the adjustment is onmaximum range, the width of the surveillancefield is approx. 11 m and the depth is approx. 8m.

~8 m~11 m

2,4 mmin.

max.

Figure: Surveillance field Observer 70

~8 m

~11 m

Figure: Top view Surveillance levelsObserver 70

2.2.1.1 Test settingThe observer 70 contains a test setting to adapt itquickly to the local conditions, even at daylight.The minimum switch-on time is approx. 10seconds. The brightness tuner is set to thesymbol 'sun'.

1min

5min 10sec

Test3min

Figure: Test setting Observer 70

2.2.2 Observer 110The rated range of the Observer 110 is definedon a mounting height of 2.50 m on a vertical wall.The inclination of the observer head is 14° toachieve the rated range.

Chap.: 2.2 Page: 2

Figure: Presentation Surveillance fieldObserver 110

The surveillance field is separated into 3surveillance levels to achieve the best densedetection. In the following picture, these levelsare illustrated in a diagram:

25m

16m

Figure: Top view Surveillance levelsObserver 110

Three levels are defined as follows:

Close range:from 0 m to approx. 0,5 m

Intermediate range:from approx. 0,5 m to approx. 5 m

Extended range:from approx. 5 m to approx. 16 m

16m

2,5m

5m 0,5m

Figure: Dimensions of the surveillance field

2.2.2.2 Spark absorberMalfunctions may be created, if inductive loadsare switched. To exclude this, the contacts of theObserver 110 are bridged by a series circuit withcapacitor and varistor. When the contacts areopened, these components lead a leakagecurrent (approx. 0.8 mA), which also flowsthrough the connected load.

Electronic relays act very sensitively on smallenergizing currents. If an electronic relay isconnected to the Observer 110, it may happenthat the relay triggers although the contact isopened. A mechanical relay should be alwaysused to avoid these disturbances.

If other Observers 110 are connected in parallelyou should note, that the capactive leakagecurrents are added. They can permanently hold amechanical relay.

If you use the following relay, you may connect 4Observer 110 in parallel:

Schupa relay type NFR-4 s/220Schupa built-in types NSH 21 and

NSH 22Eberle installation relay types

ISCH 21 and ISCH 25 to ISCH 27

If an incandescent lamp 15 Watt is connected inparallel to the relay coil of the mechanical relay,you may operate up to 10 Observers in parallel.

2.2.2.3 Set of blinds Observer 110It is possible to limit the surveillance range of theObserver 110. The supplied blinds limit the angleof surveillance from 110° to 90°, 60° or 25°.Possible sources of interferences may beeliminated by means of these specific measures.

2.2.2.4 Test settingAfter installing the Observer 110, the sensorhead should be tilt into the best position toachieve the desired surveillance field.By walking through the surveillance field andchanging the sensor head inclination, it ispossible to adjust individually the surveillanceradius.

The Observer 110 provides a separate tuner forthe test setting.

In the test setting mode the twilight switch has nofunction and the switch-on time is independenton the setting "time". It is limited to approx. 1second.

So there is a possibility to adapt the Observer110 to the local conditions by means of movingand stopping in the surveillance field (theObserver switches-off after approx. 1 sec).

Chap.: 2.2 Page: 3

2.2.3 Observer 180/10A semi-circular surveillance field of the Observer180/10 consists of 3 levels. If the Observer180/10 is fitted in a height of 2.40 m and theangle of inclination is 0°, then the width of thesurveillance field is approx. 20 m and the depthis approx. 10 m.

Figure: Surveillance field Observer 180/10

20m

10m

Figure: Top view Surveillance levelsObserver 180/10

Three levels are defined as follows:

Close range:from 0 m to approx. 3 m

Intermediate range:from approx. 3 m to approx. 6 m

Extended rangefrom approx. 6 m to approx. 10 m

2,4m

6m 3m10m

Figure: Dimensions Surveillance levels

The Observer 180/10 is designed for mountingon a flat house wall and is a low-cost alternative,if a high range or switching capacity is notrequired.

2.2.3.1 Limitation of the surveillance fieldIf required, the angle of surveillance can bereduced by means of using the blinds. Potential

interference sources are eliminated from thesurveillance field.

2.2.3.2 Test settingThe test setting of the Observer 180/10 is startedby adjusting the time tuner to minimum time(approx. 6 sec) and adjusting the brightness tunerto maximum brightness (approx. 80 lux = dayoperation).

2.2.4 Observer 180/16The Observer 180/16 has a dense, semi-circularsurveillance field of approx. 16x32 m and 3levels.

Figure: Surveillance field Observer 180/16

The size of the surveillance field is defined bythe lens geometry and a range of 16 meters isrealized.This distance is effective in the total semi-circulararea.

32m

16m

Figure: Top view Surveillance levelsObserver 180/16

If the Observer 180/16 is mounted in a height of2.40 m and the sensor head is not tilt 3surveillance levels are effective:

Close range:from 0 m to approx. 3 m

Intermediate range:from approx. 3 m to approx. 9 m

Extended range:from approx. 9 m to approx. 16 m

Chap.: 2.2 Page: 4

16m

2,4m

9m 3m

Figure: Dimensions Surveillance field

Two PIR sensors in the Observer 180/16 detectthe heat radiation.

Due to its semi-circular surveillance field theObserver 180/16 is suitable to be fitted onto flatwalls. A dense surveillance field is formed whichcloses with the house wall. If motions appearbehind the mounted Observer these are notdetected due to the angle of surveillance of 180°.Undesired switchings are excluded, if heatradiation of the mounted wall itself is detected.

2.2.5 Observer 240

The Observer 240 has a dense, rectangular fieldconsisting of 3 levels.

Figure: Surveillance field Observer 240

The size of the surveillance field is 22m x 20m.

22m

20m 16m

Figure: Top view surveillance field Observer 240

If the Observer 240 is mounted in a height of2.40 m and the sensor head is not tilt, 3surveillance levels are effective:

Close range:from 0 m to approx. 1 m

Intermediate range:from approx. 1 m to approx. 9 m

Extended range:from approx. 9 m to approx. 16 m

In the close range a special guard againstattempts to crawl under the ray is realized.

16m

2,4m

9m 1m

Figure: Dimensions Surveillance levels

Two PIR sensors are in operation, which aremounted on the printed wire board. Motionsdirectly underneath the Observer are detected bymeans of an optic, which is being turned to thebottom. That is the so-called 'guard againstattempts to crawl under the ray'.Also this opening of the guard against attemptsto crawl under the ray is equipped with a lenssystem that is described in chapter 2.1.2.

2.2.5.1 Sensivity settingA special feature of the Observer 240 is thepossibility to adjust the sensivity according to theinclination of the sensor head. If the Observer240 is inclined to reduce the range, you are ableto attenuate respectively reduce the sensitivity bymeans of a potentiometer.

Figure: Adaptation of range / sensivity

This is achieved by increasing the requiredswitch level in the threshold detection stage (seechapter 2.1,5). Higher heat changes arenecessary at reduced sensivity to trigger adetection process in the threshold stage.

Chap.: 2.2 Page: 5

In the close range a super-sensitive triggering isavoided using a tilt sensor. Smallest heatchanges are not detected, they are created bylittle animals or moving branches.

2.2.5.2 Push-on blindsThe push-on blinds supplied with the Observer180/10 and Observer 240 can be used toeliminate sources of interferences by limiting theangle of surveillance.For that purpose the blinds are cut out andpushed onto the sensor head.The Observer 240 has an additional blind for theguard against attempts to crawl under the ray.With that, interference sources close to thehouse can be excluded from the surveillancefield.

Figure: Cutting out the blindsAn example with an Observer 180/16 forexcluding lateral sources of interferences:Å : unmonitored areaÇ : monitored area

1

2

Figure: Excluding lateral sources of interferences

To exclude the extended range the lower blindlamella are cut out.Å : unmonitored areaÇ : monitored area

12

Figure: Excluding of sources of interferencesin the extended range

2.2.5.3 Test settingsThe single units 180/16 and 240 are equippedwith a test system. A switch-on process (thatmeans, the set brightness value is falling belowthe threshold level and a heat source is detectedin the surveillance field) is being indicated at thehousing of the Observer by means of a burningglow lamp. The burning of the glow lamp is tan-tamount to the switching of the power relay.The switching process is visible without con-nected the lamps and the Observer can be ad-justed to the desired monitoring area.It is sensible to set the minimum switch-ontime(approx. 4 sec) and the day operation(maximum brightness) by means of the 2 poten-tiometers.

Chap.: 2.3 Page: 1

2.3 Modular system Observer180 UP

The Observer 180 UP attachments and insertsare components of the modular system. Theycan be combined to build a complete Observer180 UP. Indoor observers may be assembledaccording to the individual requirements.Each flush-insert can be installed in a 58mmflush-box and can be combined with anattachment. Depending on the requirementsdevices can be assembled that may havedifferences in:

• the allowed load to be connected,• the convenience of operation,• the number and type of extensions,• the performance of the surveillance field,• the installation height• the protection class and• the program of the covers..

Thus, an attractive solution can be foundfor almost every possible local condition orinstallation situation.The possible combinations of the components ofthe modular system Observer 180 UP arepresented in the following table.Inserts and attachments are marked with acolour dot. You may only combine the deviceswith same colour dot.Specific problems will occur, if devices will becombined, that have not been designed for acommon operation (see table). The componentsof the inserts or attachments will not be damagein the case of a wrong combination.

l marked with red dot¡ marked with blue dot

no operation in this combination

Observer Insert withtriac

Insert withrelay contact

Extensioninsert

System insert

1 N 1 N LxS - +

Standard

1,10 m þ l

Standard devicewith factory settings

þ l

Standard devicewith factory settings

! false !

No operatingcombination !

! false !

No operatingcombination !

attachm. 2,20 m

Only forresistive loads

and extension input.For different loads(see specification)

Extension transmitsno signal to the

main station

Attachment transmitsno signal to the

system power unit

Comfort

1,10 m þ l

Comfort device withindividual

þ l

Comfort device withindividual

! false !

No operatingcombination !

! false !

No operatingcombination !

attachm. 2,20 m settings.

Only forresistive loads

settings andextension input.

For different loads(see specification)

Extension transmitsno signal to the

main station

Attachment transmitsno signal to the

system power unit

System

1,10 m ! false !

No operatingcombination !

! false !

No operatingcombination !!

þ ¡

Active extension,

þ ¡

System sensorattachm. 2,20 m

Load is notswitched on

Load switchespermanently on

only for controllingrelay inserts

for the operationin the Observer

system.

noattachm.

Incompletedevice !

Load switchespermanently on

Incompletedevice !

Load switchespermanently on

Incompletedevice !

Extension transmitsno signal to the main

station

Incompletedevice !

No signal to thesystem power unit

Table: Possible combination of inserts and attachments

Chap.: 2.3 Page: 2

2.3.1 UsageObservers 180 UP are ideal to use if a loadwould be switched depending on the demand andon motion. In a high number of cases the indoorlighting is switched. No matter which combinationof insert and attachment has been chosen, thereare two differently designed surveillance fieldsfor the Observer 180 UP. So a good solution isoffered for many applications.

The light switches are normally installed in aheight of 1.10 m in existing buildings.If the Observer 180 UP will be retrofitted, thesurveillance field of the Observer 180 UP mustbe adapted to this conditions.

Persons should be detected correctly and petsnormally should not be detected. Possibleinterferences should be kept as small as possiblejust at the planning phase.

In public buildings and commercial plantsObservers are often mounted in the entrances onthe walls.

The installation height differs very clearly fromthis of a normal light switch. To guarantee anideal detection, the surveillance field must bedesigned differently to the application describedabove.

The heart of every attachment is a double-sensor, a PIR sensor with two 'windows'. Theentered radiation is reflected directly to thesensor system by means of a mirror system.

Only other Fresnel lens are fitted in front of thesensor system (see chap. 2.1.4) to realize twodifferent versions of surveillance fields. Thus, IRrays arriving from other directions are lead to themirror system.

2.3.1.1 Version 1: Surveillance field for an installation height 1.10 m

The surveillance field is separated into two levelsthat are adjusted in an angle of 5° out of thehorizontal line.

If the observer is installed in a height of 1.10 m,the size of the surveillance field is 10 m x 12 m.

It is possible to design a typical indoor Observeronly by means of the upper surveillance fan.

1,1 m

Figure: Presentation Surveillance fieldVersion 1, Installation height 1.10m

12 m

10 m

Figure: Top view Surveillance field Version 1Installation height 1.10m

A detection, e.g. in the face area would not bepossible with a fan only in the direction to bottom,if the observer is installed in a height of 1.10 m(standard height of flush-boxes) and so a correctdetection can not be guaranteed in all cases (seealso chap. 2.1.1 Light and sensor).

1,1

m

Figure: Sectioned illustration Surveillance field Version 1

2.3.1.2 Version 2: Surveillance field for an installation height 2.20 m

The surveillance field is similar to the Observersfor outdoor use. Installing in a height of 2.20 m, afield with a depth and width of 12 m and with twolevels is detected. The close range has adistance of approx. 4.50 m.

2,2 m

Figure: Presentation Surveillance fieldVersion 2, Installation height 2.20m

Chap.: 2.3 Page: 3

12 m

12 m

4,5 m

Figure: Top view Surveillance field Version 2Installation height 2.20m

No upper surveillance fan is existing and this isdifferent to the version described before.Because of this reason, it possible to allow otherinstallation heights and to permit also outdoorapplications. By this, it is avoided that the PIRsensors are destroyed by means of the energy ofdirect sun radiation.The surveillance field and the range will changedepending on the installation height. In thefollowing figure the installation in a height of1.10m is presented.

1,1 m

Figure: Presentation Surveillance fieldVersion 2, Installation height 1.10m

6 m

6 m

2,25 m

Figure: Top view Surveillance field Version 2Installation height 1.10m

The differences to the above described versionappear transparently in the following figure, bothlevels are adjusted to the bottom.

2,2 m

1,1 m

Figure: Sectioned illustrationSurveillance field Version 2 withdifferent installation heights

2.3.1.3 Waterproof constructionIt is planned to extend the modular systemObserver 180 UP by a waterproof variant, whichwill comply to protection degree IP 44. TheObserver is then able to be installed in wetrooms, e.g. bathrooms.

2.3.2 Insert with triacThe flush mounting insert with triac is designedas a two wire device and it can replace aconventional on/off-switch or a 2-way or 4-wayswitch, also if the neutral is not available.

Figure: Triac insert

The insert with triac can be installed at any placein a given installation. The remaining switchesare replaced by normally-closed (NC) contacts.Pushing them, the circuit will be interrupted andthe load is then manually switched. The numberof the NC contacts in the circuit is not limited. Indetail, it is a series circuit with any number of NCcontacts and an insert with triac.

The device is suitable for resistive loads(standard incandescent lamps 400 W and HVhalogen lamp up to 200 W) with a minimum loadof 40 W.

If several switches of a given 4-way circuit are tobe replaced, the devices may be connected inparallel.However, a minimum load of 40 W is requiredper insert, that means the minimum load for 3inserts is 120 W.This is necessary, since all three Observers canbe switched-on at the same time. In this caseevery Observer needs its "own" minimum load of40 W.The maximum connected load will not beincreased due to the connection in parallel.

The maximum brightness of a triac-switch is lessthan that brightness switched in a circuit by amechanical switch. The value of a triac-switch is92% due to the necessary remaining phase-cut-on of 2 ms.

Chap.: 2.3 Page: 4

2.3.3 Insert with relay contactIf higher loads will be switched and activeextensions will be connected, the flush mountinginsert with relay contact will meet theserequirements. The device is designed in 3-wire-technology (neutral connection is required). It hasan extension control input `1` . Active extensions(see chapter 2.3.6.2) and/or IR- extension pushbuttons and conventional push buttons (normally-opened) may be connected to this terminal.

1 N

Figure: Insert with relay contacts

This insert, too, can be installed instead ofexisting Off- and 2-way switches, if the neutral isfound in the flush-box. A connection in parallel ispossible, but not sensible because the desiredfunctionality can be achieved more comfortable,safer and even cheaper by using an activeextension.

The power switch in this flush mounting insert isa relay contact. It provides the complete voltageto the lamp.In addition to standard incandescent lamps andHV halogen lamps (up to 1000W), conventionaland TRONIC transformers (up to 750 VA), alsofluorescent lamps or motors may be connected.

2.3.4 Standard attachmentThe standard attachment may be combined withan insert with triac and relay contacts.The attachment evaluates the ambient brightnessby means of a LDR (light dependent resistor, seechapter 2.1.4).If a motion is detected and the value is fallingbelow the factory setting of approx. 10 lux, theattachment sends a signal to the insert and theconnected load is switched-on. The minimumswitch-on time is also set to approx. 2 minutes inthe factory. However, the minimum switch-ontime is reset by each new motion and is runningagain (retriggering). If there is a permanentmotion in the surveillance range, the light willremain on. The threshold value of the brightnessof 10 lux is no more relevant, if the lighting isswitched once, since the ambient brightness hasbe changed anyway by means of the switchedlighting.

Just using of the Observer 180 UP, it is possiblethat the shadow of a walking person covers theLDR in the device, because the Observers areinstalled in the height of the light switches. Atrigger delay is realized in the attachment toavoid, that a short dark time of the brightnesstogether with a motion in front of the sensor willcause a faulty switching, although the brightnessis sufficient.

2.3.5 Comfort attachmentThe functionality of the comfort attachment is asequal as the standard attachment. In addition it ispossible to set some features individually. Theseare in detail:

Adjustment of the brightness thresholdvalue:

The brightness threshold value can be changedcontinuously in the range of approx. 3-80 lux bymeans of a potentiometer in the attachment.The setting of the potentiometer to the marking"sun" (= 80 lux) means daylight operation. Thelighting is switched independent on the ambientbrightness, if motion is detected.This is sensible in situations, when the sensor islighted up directly by means of other light, e.g.lighting close to the Observer or windows, but thearea to be lighted is always in the dark, far awayfrom the flush mounting Observer.Again, in the test mode a setting onto daylightoperation is convenient.

Figure: Adjustment of the brightnessthreshold value

Adjustment of the minimum switching-ontime:

The minimum switch-on time can be adjustedfrom approx. 10 sec to 10 min by means of apotentiometer. With that, it is possible to reducethe switching-on time of the lighting to aminimum, e.g. in short passages. Then thelighting is not longer in operation, as it isnecessary.If the Observer controls a lavatory lighting or aventilator, the switching-on time has to beincreased essentially.

It is recommended to set the test setting on 10seconds at setting-up.

Chap.: 2.3 Page: 5

10 sec

1 min5 min

10 min

Figure: Adjustment of the minimumswitch-on time

Adjustment of the sensivity:

The sensivity can be reduced from 100% toapprox. 20%. So an adaptation to the roomcondition is possible.Very often flush mounting Observers are used insmall passages and corridors that have a width ofonly 2 m. It is not required to operate the devicewith the 100% sensivity. In this caseit may happen, that processes are unintentionallydetected.These processes are, e.g. heat reflection fromlight walls, walls with glasses or mirrors orperhaps they are created by the lighting switchedby the Observer itself.A LV lighting contains a very high red light part,which is perhaps recognized as a heat change.The time constants of the cooling of the lampsare in the range of seconds.The reduction of the sensitivity gives a possibilityto attenuate this interferences.

Figure: Adjustment of the sensitivity

Operation mode switch:

By means of the operation mode switch theObserver can be set into Permanent-Off,Permanent-ON or Automatic operation.

The Automatic operation can be locked to avoida switching-on or -off by mistake.Permanent light is useful for works as cleaning orrenovation. Switching the light frequently wouldbe felt troublesome.If the switching on demand should be disabled(e.g. light effects during presentations) you canmeet this request by using the operation modeswitch.

2.3.6 Operation with extensionsA switch respectively main station is created bycombining an insert with relay contacts with astandard or comfort attachment. Any desirednumber of extensions may be connected to the

extension input "1" of the insert with relaycontacts.Suitable extensions are:

• Conventional push buttons with normally-opencontacts (non-lighted),

• IR-push buttons with permanent pulse 40 VA,• IR-extension push buttons 4fold Eb,• and, of course, the active Observer 180 UP

extension, which is composed of theextension insert and a system attachment(see the following chapter)

An extension does not switch a load, it onlysends a pulse to the main station.The main station is able to identify whether thepulse is sent by a passive (e.g. conv. pushbutton) or active extension (see figure Principlecircuit Extension identification)

If a pulse of a passive extension is identified, themain station is switching independently on theambient brightness. A signal of an activeObserver 180 UP extension is linked to an ANDin the attachment, so that the load is onlyswitched, when the brightness is below thethreshold value of the attachment.Using this both extension types, the lighting isswitched-on for the time that has been set in theattachment.

2.3.6.1 Why active extensions?You may not agree immediately to the necessityof active extensions, though at the first sight thesame functionality can be achieved by switchingObservers in parallel. But some arguments shallquickly display the transparency and show theadvantages using active extensions instead ofconnecting Observers in parallel.

Besides the financial advantages using theextension insert instead of an insert with triac orwith relay contacts, there are also very wellreasons due to the functions.

So only, e.g. a combination of the main stationand the extension support the evaluation of onesole brightness value. The brightness value isexclusively evaluated in the attachment of themain station and it is independent on the ambientbrightness at the extensions.Connecting in parallel, the brightness evaluationis active in every device. Then it may happenthat a light situation occurs which is different atevery device. Although every device has thesame set brightness threshold value, one devicecan be active while the others are still locked.

Chap.: 2.3 Page: 6

A synchronisation of the threshold values isalmost impossible due to the componenttolerances in addition.Furthermore, it is possible that one devicedetecting motion switches-on the light and thenthe other devices in the lighted area are locked.Of course, the other devices identify a "Bright"and do not switch.The locking time was integrated to exclude asudden re-switching of the lighting because of thedetection of heat reflection (see chapter 2.1.5.Principle circuit Release).In parallel circuits, the locking time that isrealized in the insert with triac and with relay

contacts is only active in that device, thatswitched the light. All other devices connected inparallel are not locked.In chapter 2.1.6 these possible problems aredescribed in detail.These problems do not occur due to theinterworking of the main station and theextensions. The active extensions send only asignal, if a motion is detected. Brightnessevaluation, switch-on time and locking time arerealized exclusively in the main station.

R1 R2

D1Th1

D2 R3

R4

OK

Pushbutton

Insert with relay contacts

Sensors of theextension

1

NN

1

Extensioninsert(activeextension)

U0

Extensioninput

Passiveextension(Push button) L L L

Signal to the attachment:No insertActive ins.Passive ins.

The ground potential is the mains phase.

Figure: Principle circuit Extension identification

If the Observer is in steady state (no extensionsignal is existing), only one sine half wave isapplied to the optocoupler OK by means of thediode D1 and the resistors R2 and R3. A 50 Hzsquare signal occurs at the output of the OK witha duty cycle of 1:1.

The thyristor Th1 is in on-state, if a signal arrivesfrom the active extension. The positive half waveapplied to OK by D1 is added to a complete sinewave by means of Th1 and R1.

If the push button is pressed, the applied halfwave is lead by D2 and the push button toground. Practically the OK is shorted and has alow-signal, for the time the push button ispressed.

The minimum time of a correct identification atthe extension insert of the attachment is 200msec.The three minimum signals are possible for thesupport of the attachment.There, they are calculated by means of anintegrator.The passive extension generates a Low-signal,the active one generates a High-signal.If the extension is not active, a signal betweenHigh and Low is formed from the 50 Hzrectangular signal.A window comparator evaluates the signals. Itactivates either no output or the output of thepassive extension depending on the input signal.The main station recognizes the kind of outputsignal and then it knows the type of attachment.

Chap.: 2.3 Page: 7

2.3.6.2 Extension insertThe extension insert is designed to controlactively the insert with relays, it can not be usedas a single device. The devices are connected tothe neutral conductor and to that phaseconductor to which the insert with relay is alsoconnected to. The signalling pulse is transferredto the main station by means of the connection tothe extension terminal `1`. It is possible toconnect any desired number of active extensionsin parallel.

1 N

Figure: Extension insert

2.3.6.3 Attachment for the insert(System attachment)

The system attachment is used as theattachment for the extension insert.

You are able to adapt the range to the localconditions by means of the sensivity adjustment(1). This is similar to the comfort attachment. Theprevious model of the system attachment had notthe implemention this feature.

Å

Figure: Sensivity adjustment of the extension attachment

The ambient brightness is detected, but it is notevaluated, if you use the combination with theextension insert.A pulse serves to control the extension insert orsystem insert. This is the sensor signal, which isapplied for the time of detection.

Chap.: 2.4 Page: 1

2.4 Observer systemEverywhere the Observer system is ideal to usein, when the local conditions make several PIRsensors necessary and one common load has tobe switched.The difference to the single device described inchapter 2.2 is the device construction. TheObserver system consists of two separatecomponents. These are the system sensorsdetecting the heat radiation and the systempower unit processing the switching commands.

Up to 8 system sensors can be connected to onechannel of the system power unit by means ofsimple connection technology

Figure: System overview

The use of the Observer system offers extensiveadvantages:

• Financial advantage, if more than two singlesystem sensors are connected and comparedwith two single devices connected in parallel.

• Functional advantage, i.e. brightnessevaluation by means of one reference sensor

• Reduced expenditure of installation by using awire with small cross-section

• up to 8 system sensor switch one commonload

• it is possible to combine weather-proofoutdoor Observers and flush mounting indoorObserver

• Easy to maintain and to change by means ofone only time and brightness adjustment forup to 8 system sensors

• Small, discreet system sensors by means of aseparate power unit with high switchingcapacity

• Additional safety by the supply of low voltage• The power unit may be installed 'invisibly' in

the distribution board (REG)

2.4.1 System power unitsThe centre of an Observer system installation isthe system power unit, which is available indifferent constructions. Besides a variant forsurface mounting (AP), a variant for fitting intodistribution boards (REG) is existing and theycontain one channel (to install maximum 8sensors) or two channels (to install maximum 2 x8 sensors)

2.4.1.1 System power unit AP (surface mounting)

The 1-channel surface mounting version is verysuitable for the easy retrofitting of existinginstallations. For this purpose, it is recommendedto install it near to the lamp that will be switched.So, the mains wires are as a short as possible,and the system sensors can be controlled bymeans of the fine wire JY-(ST)-Y (or similar)which is easy to fit (see chapter 2.4.3)

The power unit has a green control lamp, whichinforms about the switching state of the device,even if no load is applied.The switched lamp may be not installed in thevisible area of the user - however an operationtest is possible at any time.

80

10

XUL

Lx- +L N S

5

N.

ca.

1

Figure: System power unit AP, illustratedwith opened connection area

2.4.1.2 System power unit REG 1-channelThe power unit REG 1-channel contains apotential-isolated contact, which switches thecontrol circuit and the load circuit. The controlcircuit is connected to the mains by means of theterminals 'L1' and 'N'. A normally-open contact isrealized for the load terminal at the terminals '4'and '1'.If the control and the load circuit are to besupplied by one phase, an isolated wire jumperbetween the terminals 'L1' and '4' must beinstalled. This wire jumper must have a minimumcross-section of 1.5 mm2 due to the highswitching capacity up to 2500 W. The potential-isolated contact is also suitable for low voltage.

Chap.: 2.4 Page: 2

In this case, the wire jumper is not allowed to beinstalled, the contact can be connectedseparately.

This device, too, indicates the switching state ofthe relay contact by means of a LED. So, a quicktest of the Observer system installation ispossible.

Lx S - +

N L1 L1

1580

4

1

Figure: System power unit 1-channel REG

2.4.1.2 System power unit REG 2-channelThe 2-channel power unit REG contains tworelay contacts, which operate independently fromone another and both have a separateadjustment of the minimum switching-on timeand the brightness threshold value.You are able to connect up to 8 sensors (seechapter above). Each channel has a LED thatindicates the switching of the load.

Channel 1 is connected to potential, e.g. thedevice is connected to that phase, and by meansof that phase, the load of channel 1 is alsoswitched.

Channel 2 is designed to switch any desiredphase by means of a potential-isolated contact.It not allowed to use low voltage, because thedevice does not follow the requirements of theminimum contact gaps. This results from thesmall housing (2 channels in on housing).

N

Lx 1 S1 - + Lx 2 S2 - +

L1 L 2

8080

Figure: System power unit 2-channel REG

2.4.2 System sensorsThree different system sensors comply withalmost all requirements:

1. System sensor 180/16The surveillance field is similar to theObserver 180/16, described in chapter 2.2.4.The system sensor 180/16 contains a LED,which indicates detections. The real switchingprocedure (dependent on the brightness) isdisplayed in the system power unit.

2. System sensor 240Also this device contains the surveillance fieldthat is known from the Observer 240 andwhich is described in chapter 2.2.5.The indication of a surveillance process issimilar to the system sensor 180/16.

3. System sensor 180 UPThe system sensor 180 UP is composed oftwo components, which are used in themodular system Observer 180 UP: the systeminsert and the system attachment.According to all Observer 180 UPattachments, two versions with differentsurveillance fields exist (see chapter 2.3.1).

Lx S - +

Figure: System insert

Up to 8 sensors per channel of a system powerunit may be combined, independently on theirconstruction and their surveillance field.

2.4.3 ConnectionThe installation work is small, as a 4-core wirewith a small cross-section is used to connect thesystem sensors to the system power unit. Werecommend using the telephone wire JY-(ST)-Y2x2x0.6 or JY-(ST)-Y 2x2x0.8, which is wellknown in the telephone installation.

The sensors are switched in parallel and a star-shaped, a line-shaped wiring or a mixture ofthese may be used.

It is important, that the Lx-terminal is connectedonly to one sensor per power unit (in thefollowing figures it is marked with an "x")

Chap.: 2.4 Page: 3

max.

Lxo

S

+-Lx

Lxo

S

+-Lx

Lxo

S

+-Lx

+L

NLx

-S

1

2

3

8

x

max.

Lxo

S

+-Lx

Lxo

S

+-Lx

Lxo

S

+-Lx

+L

NLx

-S

1

2

3

8

x

Figure. Connection of system devices

This allows the user to adjust the brightnessthreshold value of the whole system by onereference sensor. The brightness signal Lx of thereference sensor is transferred to the systempower unit by means of the terminal Lxo of theother system sensors. The terminal Lxo has noconnection to the electronic and only serves fordistribution. By that means, a simple and quickinstallation is guaranteed. This terminal is notavailable in the Observer 180 UP system, due tothe small construction.

Pay attention to the reference sensor. It may notbe fitted in the shadow of plants or walls.

The voltage drop on the wire should be small toguarantee a faultless operation. For that in thecase of a star-shaped installation, keep amaximum length of 100m between the powersystem unit and each system sensor. So, thereare 8 system sensors allowed and each isconnected with a wire of 100m length to thepower unit.

1

2

8

max. 100 mmax. 100 m

max. 100 m

Lx S - +

N L1 L1 4

1

Figure: Star-shaped wiring

In the case of a line-shaped wiring, the maximumlength of the wire between the system power unitand the final system sensor may not exceed100m.

1

2

8

max.100 m

Figure: Line-shaped wiring

2.4.4 Set-up of the Observer systemAll variants of the power unit have an adjustmentfor the brightness threshold value and theminimum switching-on time.While setting-up the Observer system, it isrecommended to set the installed power unit tothe minimum time and maximum brightness (dayoperation). This is similar to all set-ups of PIRObserver.For this purpose, all necessary sensors areconnected one after another. The function andsettings are tested by walking.The surface mounting (AP) sensors have a LEDin the lower part of the housing, which indicates adetection by flashing. A test by walking is alsopossible without any connected load.Additionally the test-LED, which is integrated inthe system power unit, shows the switching stateof the relay contact, independently on the load.If all sensors are mounted and adjustedaccording to their detection area, the adjustmentpotentiometers are set to the desired time andbrightness.Then the system is in operation.

2.4.5 Principle construction of the Observersystem

The power unit is the centre of an Observersystem installation. Loads, mostly lighting, areswitched, and the system sensors are suppliedwith voltage by means of this device.

A direct voltage of 15 V is used, which can betaken from the terminals '+' and '-' of the systempower unit. An additional safety is guaranteed bymeans of this small supply voltage, as thesystem sensors are separated from the mains.

Moreover the power unit evaluates the analoguesignal (approx. 5.8 V bright to 8.5 V dark) of theambient brightness, which is applied to the Lx-terminal by a sensor. The threshold value can beadjusted to approx. 3 - 80 Lux, using thepotentiometer.

Chap.: 2.4 Page: 4

The switching signal of the connected sensors istransferred to the power unit by means of the 'S-terminals'. The power unit evaluates thedetection process.

The mains voltage of the power unit and thesignal wires of the system sensors (Lx and S) arenot allowed to be installed in one common cable.A coupling of the switching procedure onto thesignal wires would result. Functional faults andundesired switching of the installation would begenerated.

We can summarize:All connected sensors have only the task todetect reliably motion and to transmit this to thepower unit. In addition, one sensor only transmitsthe brightness value.The potentiometers for the brightness thresholdand the minimum switching-on time can be foundin the power unit. It supplies the sensors, linksthe motion signals in a logic and switches theconnected load for the adjusted time.

Chap.: 2.5 Page: 1

2.5 Powerful features of the ObserversThe technical data, described here, have been up-to-date, when the Electronic Handbook was published.We reserve the right to change the technical data and so, the technical data are no mores valid in caseof changes, which serve the technical progress. As the technical data are always up-to-date in theoperating instructions, which are delivered with the product, in important cases the operating instructionshould be taken for decision.

Technical data Observer 70° Observer 110° Observer180°/10

Observer180°/16

Observer 240°

Supply voltage 230 V, 50 Hz 230V, 50 Hz 230V, 50 Hz 230V, 50 Hz 230V, 50 HzPower consumption approx. 1.1 W approx.1.3 W approx.1.1 W approx.1.1 W approx.1.1 WAmbient temperature -25 °C / +55 °C -35°C / +50°C -25°C / +50°C -25°C / +55°C -25°C / +55°CSwitching capacityIncandescent lamps 1000 W 2200 W 1000 W 2500 W 2500 WHV halogen lamps 1000 W 1000 W 500 W 2500 W 2500 WLV halogen lamps conv. transformers 750 VA --- --- --- --- TRONIC transformer 750 W --- --- --- ---Fluorescent lamps not compensated 500 VA --- --- 1200 VA 1200 VA parallel compensated 400 VA (47µF) --- --- 920 VA 920 VA lead-lag circuit 1000 VA --- --- 2400 VA 2400 VAStarting current max. 16 A max. 20 A max. 20 A max. 20 ASwitching time approx. 10 sec to

approx. 5 minapprox.12 sec toapprox. 12 min

approx. 4 sec toapprox. 15 min

approx. 4 sec toapprox. 15 min

approx. 4 sec toapprox. 15 min

Brightness sensor LDR LDR LDR LDR LDRBrightness valuecontinuously adjustable

yes yes yes yes yes

Sensivity reduction --- --- --- --- yesRecommended fittingheight

2.4 m 2.5 m 2.4 m 2.4 m 2.4 m

Surveillance levels 5 3 3 3 3Close range 0 m to approx.0.5 m 0 m to approx.3 m 0 m to approx.3 m 0 m to approx.1 mIntermediate range adjustable 0.5 m to approx.5 m 3 m to approx.6 m 3 m to approx.9 m 1 m to approx.9 mExtended range 5 m to approx.16 m 6 m to approx.10 m 9 m to approx.16 m 9 m to approx.16 mSize of thesurveillance field

8 m x 11 m

~8 m~11 m

2,4 mmin.

max.

~8 m

~11 m

25 m x 16 m

25m

16m

20 m x 10 m

20m

10m

32 m x 16 m

32m

16m

20 m x 22 m

22m

20m 16m

Chap.: 2.5 Page: 2

Technical data Systemsensor 180/16

Systemsensor 240

Power unitAP

Power unitREG 1fold

Power unitREG 2fold

Supply voltage DC 15 V DC 15 V AC 230 V, 50 Hz AC 230 V, 50 Hz AC 230 V, 50 HzPower consumption approx. 0.6 W approx. 0.6 W 1.1 W 1.1 W 1.8 WAmbient temperature -25 °C / +55 °C -25 °C / +55 °C -25 °C / +55 °C -25 °C / +55 °C -25 °C / +55 °CSwitching capacity operation only with

system power unitoperation only withsystem power unit

Incandescent lamps --- --- 2500 W 2500 W 2500 WHV halogen lamps --- --- 2500 W 2500 W 2500 WLV halogen lamps conv. transformers --- --- --- --- --- TRONIC transformer --- --- --- --- ---Fluorescent lamps not compensated --- --- 1200 VA 1200 VA 1200 VA parallel compensated --- --- 920 VA 920 VA 920 VA lead-lag circuit --- --- 2400 VA 2400 VA 2400 VAStarting current --- --- max. 20 A max. 20 A max. 20 ASwitching time --- --- approx. 4 sec to

approx. 15 minapprox. 4 sec toapprox. 15 min

approx. 4 sec toapprox. 15 min

Brightness sensor LDR LDR --- --- ---Brightness valuecontinuously adjustable

--- --- yes yes yes

Sensivity reduction --- yes --- --- ---Recommended fittingheight

2.4 m 2.4 m --- --- ---

Surveillance levels 3 3 --- --- ---Close range 0 m to approx.3 m 0 m to approx.1 m --- --- ---Intermediate range 3 m to approx.9 m 1 m to approx.9 m --- --- ---Extended range 9 m to approx.16 m 9 m to approx.16 m --- --- ---Size of thesurveillance field

32 m x 16 m

32m

16m

20 m x 22 m

22m

20m 16m

--- --- ---

Chap.: 2.5 Page: 3

Technical data Insert with triac Insert withrelay contacts

Extensioninsert

Systeminsert

Supply voltage AC 230 V, 50 Hz AC 230 V, 50 Hz AC 230 V, 50 Hz DC 15 VPower consumptionAmbient temperature -25 °C / +55 °C -25 °C / +55 °C -25 °C / +55 °C -25 °C / +55 °CSwitching capacity operation only with

insert with relaycontacts

operation only withsystem power unit

Incandescent lamps 40 - 400 W 1000 W --- ---HV halogen lamps 40 - 200 W 1000 W --- ---LV halogen lamps conv. transformers --- 750 VA --- --- TRONIC transformer --- 750 W --- ---Fluorescent lamps not compensated --- 500 VA --- --- parallel compensated --- 400 VA --- --- lead-lag circuit --- 1000 VA --- ---Starting current max. max. --- ---Switching time --- --- --- ---Brightness sensor --- --- --- ---Brightness valuecontinuously adjustable

--- --- --- ---

Sensivity reduction --- --- --- ---Recommended fittingheight

1.1 m 1.1 m 1.1 m 1.1 m

Surveillance levelsClose range --- --- --- ---Intermediate range --- --- --- ---Extended range --- --- --- ---Size of thesurveillance field

T 1,6 H 250 T 6,3 H 250 --- ---

--- --- --- ---

Chap.: 2.5 Page: 4

Technical data Standardattachment

Comfortattachment

Systemattachment

Supply voltage by the insert by the insert by the insertPower consumptionAmbient temperature -25 °C / +55 °CSwitching capacityIncandescent lamps --- --- ---HV halogen lamps --- --- ---LV halogen lamps conv. transformers --- --- --- TRONIC transformer --- --- ---Fluorescent lamps not compensated --- --- --- parallel compensated --- --- --- lead-lag circuit --- --- ---Starting current --- ---Switching time approx. 2 min

(permanent)approx. 10 sec. toapprox. 10 min.

---

Brightness sensor LDR LDR LDRBrightness valuecontinuously adjustable

approx. 10 Lux(permanent)

yes, approx. 3 - 80Lux+ day operation

---

Sensivity reduction --- yesapprox. 100 - 20%

---

Recommended fittingheight

1.1 m 1.1 m 1.1 m

Surveillance levels 2 2 2Close range --- --- ---Intermediate range --- --- ---Extended range --- --- ---Size of thesurveillance field

10 m x 12 m

12 m10 m

12 m

10 m

10 m x 12 m

12 m10 m

12 m

10 m

10 m x 12 m

12 m10 m

12 m

10 m

Chap.: 3.1 Page: 1

3. Devices with automatic time functions

3.1 Electronic Controller for shutter and blinds

3.1.1 GeneralIncreasingly mechanical push buttons andswitches are replaced by electronic controls thatoperate motor driven shutter, blinds and movingdoors to get the advantage of a comfortableautomatic operation.

These electronic controls are programmableand switch automatically the drives at desiredtimes. Additionally a manual operation ispossible.

As motors contain an own switch input for everydirection, the Electronic Controller for Shutterand Blinds has also two switch outputs, one forthe function "UP" and one for the function"DOWN". It is shown in the figures Blockstructure Electronic Controller for Shutter andBlinds and Connection diagram ElectronicController for Shutter and Blinds (see chapter3.1.4).

The Electronic Controller for Shutter and Blindshas always the task to switch "ON", either thefunction "UP" or the function "DOWN". The moveis interrupted immediately at manual stop,otherwise it is interrupted by the limit switch. Thecontroller switches-off itself after 2 minutes, toprevent damages by means of jammed shutter.The switching-"OFF" always happens in that way,independently on the program.

At present, the following convenience is offered:− Display of the current time, weekday and the

summertime respectively wintertime,− Manual operation is possible at any time,− Automatic Mode− Automatic Mode combined with random

generator,− Automatic Mode combined with Astro Mode− Automatic Mode combined with random

generator and Astro Mode.

The manual operation has priority, the desiredfunction is executed independently on theprogram.

In the Automatic modes switching is executed atthe daytimes and weekdays, which areprogrammed before by the user.

The programmed switch times will vary, when therandom generator is switched-on. The randomgenerator calculates a time, by which theprogrammed switch times will be varied.By means of the then arbitrary executed shuttermoves, a presence of person is simulated andpossible undesired visitors are frightened.

The Astro Mode adapts the programmed switchtimes to the sunrise and sunset, to reach anexecution of the switch times at the time of thebeginning day's or ending day's brightness. Thusan often re-programming is cancelled by meansof the different sunrises and sunsets in the year.

If Astro Mode and Random Mode are activated,switch times are adapted to the times of therelevant sunrise and sunset.

Detailed descriptions of the operation modes canbe seen in chapter 3.1.6.3

Display

Powersupply

Power unit(Flush mounting insert)

LN

UP

DOWN Auxiliarysupply

EEPROM

Timer quartzClockKeyboard

Driver

Control electronic(attachment module)

MicroprocessorROM

RAM

Fuse

Relay

Relay

Figure: Block structure Electronic Controller for Shutter and Blinds

Chap.: 3.1 Page: 2

3.1.2 Principles of function:The principle function of the device is visible inthe figure Electronic Controller for Shutter andBlinds . The signal processing is digital. Thecontrol electronic contains a microprocessor withthree different memory types, which aredescribed as following:

1. Internal processor ROM (Read OnlyMemory):The program, which has been created for themicroprocessor by the developer, is stored in thismemory in the factory. Afterwards the contents ofthe memory can not be changed anymore. It isread by the microprocessor permanently and isexecuted. So the function of the ElectronicController for Shutter and Blinds is defined. TheROM stores its contents also in case of a voltageloss.

2. Internal processor RAM (Random AccessMemory):The processor stores all data in this memorywhich are generated during operation, e.g. thecurrent time that is always changing. The RAMcontents is deleted by means of a voltage loss atthe processor component.

3. External processor EEPROM (ElectricalErasable and Programmable Read OnlyMemory):The EEPROM combines the features of the RAMand ROM. The processor can both read andwrite, and stores all information. In the case of anunlimited voltage loss, the processor writes theswitch times into this memory that are defined bythe user. In every case, they are stored until a re-programming.

By means of the keyboard the user entersdirectly the command to the processor. The dataare processed depending on the program in theROM. The speed of the processor is defined by aclock circuit, which oscillates in the range ofapprox. 4 MHz.

The current time is not calculated from this clockcircuit. A high-precise clock quartz is available,which oscillates exactly 32.768 times per second.When the user has entered once the currenttime, the processor determines permanently thenew current time by means of evaluation of theinput signal of the clock quartz.

The processor always compares the current timewith the switch time, programmed by the user.If they match, the processor switches the relaysin the power unit by means of a driver stage,which is used to amplify the signal. Thus a coil of

the connected shutter or blind motor is applied tovoltage, and the corresponding move isexecuted.

A liquid crystal display LCD is used fordisplaying. The processor directly drives thesegments.

The power supply supplies all components withvoltage. An auxiliary power supply supports thevoltage supply of the electronic in case of shortmains failures. So, the processor can hold itsmost important internal functions and a loss ofRAM data is prevented.

This auxiliary supply can be ensured in principleby means of a buffer accumulator or buffercapacitor. Both methods have advantages. Anaccumulator saves the data for longer times(some months), but it has a short lifetime and itrequires more space. For this reason, a buffercapacitor is implemented in the device describedhere. It saves the data in the range of hours(maximum time = 2 hours), it needs nomaintenance and less space. As longer mainsfailures occur extreme rarely, a data savingagainst loss for 2 hours is very absolutelysufficient

3.1.3 Technical construction:The Electronic Controller for Shutter and Blindscontains of the two following modular parts:

1. Power unit with relay technology, able to bemounted in a standard flush-box or a surfacehousing.

2. Control electronic with microprocessor andperipheral components, which is pushed ontothe power unit.

The control circuit is free of maintenance. Thecontroller is equipped with 9 memory switch timeregisters free programmable for one "UP" andone "DOWN" time each. For execution, thesetimes can be assigned to any desiredcombination of weekdays

Existing mechanical switches may be replaced, ifthe neutral conductor is available in the flush-box.

3.1.4 Fitting and installation:1. Connect and fit the power unit according to

figure Connection diagram ElectronicController for Shutter and Blinds .

Chap.: 3.1 Page: 3

2. Push the frame with the control electronicmodule onto the power unit and snap intoposition.

Power unit(Flush mouting insert)

Control electronic(Attachment module)

Figure: Mounting drawing

M

NL1

max. 1 Motor1000VA

N

AU

FA

B

Figure: Connection diagram Electronic Controller for Shutter and Blinds

Attention, information about safety:The Electronic Controller for Shutter and Blindsis designed for automatic operation of windowshutter or blinds. If it is used for other purposescreating danger (e.g. moving doors), the user hasto exclude this danger by means of installingadditional safety measures (e.g. light barriers).

3.1.5 Initial set-up:After applying the mains voltage for the first time,the activation of the LCD takes up to 60 seconds.

During this time, the internal buffer capacitor ischarged, to ensure the data saving.If the capacitor is loaded, the display, describedin chapter 3.1.6.1, is showing:

− Weekday: Monday,(Mark next to the weekday abbreviation "Mo")

− Time: 00:00,(Presentation in the main display)

− Season: Wintertime,(Symbol: Skier is shown)

− Calendar week: 1,(readable in the main display, after the firstoperation)

− Operation mode: Manual.(Dot over the text "Manuell")

If the Electronic Controller for Shutter and Blindsshould not react on any key stroke (due to a falseoperation), pull of the attachment unit forminimum 30 seconds. Thus, a reset of theinternal microprocessor is ensured. Theprogrammed data are not affected.

The programming is realized by means of thekeys. Please note the operating instructions inspecial cases. It is recommended to create atable as shown on this page, before enteringmany different switch times at differentweekdays.

To simplify the set-up of the Electronic Controllerfor Shutter and Blinds, two switch times are pre-programmed ex works (switch time 1 and switchtime 2). At any time the user may change themindividually.

Switch time 1:mon-fri 7.00 h UP

22.00 h DOWN

Switch time 2:sat-sun 8.30 h UP

22.00 h DOWN

Activating the Automatic Mode, the Randomgenerator and/or the Astro Mode, thecorresponding symbols will appear in the display.

Chap.: 3.1 Page: 4

Planning aidSwitch Time No.. Ù Ú Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun

Example: 08.30 22.00 X X123456789

3.1.6 Operation3.1.6.1 Display and operation elements

Selection ofman./auto-matic mode

Automaticmode on

Time

DisplaySummertime

DisplayWintertime

DisplayWeekday

Programswitch times

Adjusttime

Adjustcalendarweek

Adjustweekday

Summer-/wintertimeadjustment

UP

DOWNSwitch time no.

Manual mode AutoManuell Zufall Astro

Tag Prog

DiMiDoFrSaSo

Mo

Woche

Einstellen Enter

Man/Auto

DOWNUP

Selection of adjustment mode Enter

Randommode on

Astromode on

Figure: Display and operation elements

3.1.6.2 ProgrammingTransition to setting mode:

Touch key Einstellen (1.), then touch the keyEnter within 2 seconds (2.).

Now the Controller is in the mode for adjustingthe current time, and the desired switch timescan be programmed.

In general it is mentioned:Chosen values must be confirmed by Enter, asonly by operating the Enter-key the values arewritten into the memory.

The setting mode will automatically be left, if nokey stroke is detected within 5 minutes. Thedevice switches into the previous operation mode(Normal mode).

By means of key Einstellen the setting mode canbe left at any time.

If values have been changed before leaving thesetting mode, but they have not been confirmedby Enter, they will not be stored in the memory.

Chap.: 3.1 Page: 5

Einstellen Enter

Man/Auto

1. 2.

Figure: Calling the setting mode

Setting of summertime/wintertime:

In the display a dot appears under the symbol, the adjusted symbol flashes. Set

summertime/wintertime by keyÙ or Ú.Confirm the selection by Enter.

Einstellen Enter

Man/Auto

AutoManuell Zufall Astro

Tag Prog

DiMiDoFrSaSo

Mo

Woche

Figure: Setting of summertime/wintertime

Setting the present calendarweek

The dot is moved forward to "Woche" (week), theadjusted calendarweek flashes. Set thecalendarweek by key Ù or Ú.For rapid motion press the key for approx. 3seconds.Confirm with Enter

Einstellen Enter

Man/Auto

AutoManuell Zufall Astro

Tag Prog

DiMiDoFrSaSo

Mo

Woche

Figure: Setting the calendarweek

Please, see calendar for the currentcalendarweek (KW), as this date may vary fromyear to year by few days. For further explanationsee figures Times of sunrise and Times of sunsetin chapter 3.1.6.3

Setting the present weekday:

The dot is moved forward to "Tag" (day), themark at the right display margin is flashing andindicates the weekday. Set the weekday by key Ù or Ú.

Confirm with Enter.

Einstellen Enter

Man/Auto

AutoManuell Zufall Astro

Tag Prog

DiMiDoFrSaSo

Mo

Woche

Figure: Setting the weekday

Setting the present time:

The dot is moved forward to "»", the timeflashes. Set the present time with key Ù or Ú.For rapid motion press the key for approx. 3seconds.Confirm the setting with Enter

Einstellen Enter

Man/Auto

AutoManuell Zufall Astro

Tag Prog

DiMiDoFrSaSo

Mo

Woche

Figure: Setting the time

Chap.: 3.1 Page: 6

Calling a switch time number:

The dot is moved forward to "Prog", the symbolfor "Auf" (Up) time 1 flashes. Calling furtherswitch time numbers with Ù or Ú.For changing the "Auf" (Up) or "Ab" (Down) timeof a switch time number, confirm with Enter .

Einstellen Enter

Man/Auto

AutoManuell Zufall Astro

Tag Prog

DiMiDoFrSaSo

Mo

Woche

Figure: Setting the switch time number

If the switch time of any desired switch timenumber is changed or set, the programmedswitch times of all other switch times remainunaffected. They must not be entered again.Note a time of 2 minutes between allprogrammed shutter movements! .

Programming of the "Auf" (Up) time:

The "Auf" (Up) time of the corresponding switchtime number flashes and can be changed bypressing Ù or Ú . For rapid motion press the keyfor approx. 3 seconds. Confirm the "Auf" (Up)time with Enter

Einstellen Enter

Man/Auto

AutoManuell Zufall Astro

Tag Prog

DiMiDoFrSaSo

Mo

Woche

Figure: Programming the "Auf" (Up) time

Programming the "Ab" (down) time:

The "Ab" (Down) time of the correspondingswitch time number flashes and can be changedby pressing Ù or Ú . For rapid motion press thekey for approx. 3 seconds. Confirm the "Ab"(Down) time with Enter .

Einstellen Enter

Man/Auto

AutoManuell Zufall Astro

Tag Prog

DiMiDoFrSaSo

Mo

Woche

Figure: Programming the "Ab" (Down) time

Programming the weekdays:

If no day is active, the weekdays Mo (Monday),Mi (Wednesday), Fr (Friday), So (Sunday) flashin exchange with Di (Tuesday), Do (Thursday),Sa (Saturday). No execution of thecorresponding switch times is effected!But when days are active, these flashcontinuously. The switch time is executed onthese days. The settings are stored with Enterwithout a change, with the key Ú an alteration ofthe set weekday is started.

Einstellen Enter

Man/Auto

AutoManuell Zufall Astro

Tag Prog

DiMiDoFrSaSo

Mo

Woche

Figure: Display of the weekdays

Chap.: 3.1 Page: 7

If the alteration of the set weekdays is started bymeans of the key Ú, the flashing mark movesforward to Mo (Monday). Pressing Enter,programs the day (it is indicated permanently), Úleaves the day out (after that it is indicated nomore). Afterwards the flashing mark moves a dayfurther. When So (Sunday) is programmed or leftout, the next switch time can be programmed. Incase of programming errors of the previousswitch time, this can be re-called by means of thekey Ú. If no further switch times will beprogrammed, the setting can be interrupted byEinstellen. An automatic interruption occurs afterswitch time 9. After an interruption the normaltime appears, as the device falls back into theprevious operation mode (normal mode).

Einstellen Enter

Man/Auto

AutoManuell Zufall Astro

Tag Prog

DiMiDoFrSaSo

Mo

Woche

Figure: Programming the weekdays

Checking the set dates:

Touch Einstellen (Adjustment), then touch thekey Enter within 2s. Now the device is in theSetting mode again. A further touching on keyEnter shows all dates without altering them. Byreaching the first switch time number, a quickcheck of switch times is possible by pressing Ùor Ú . An interruption of the checking is alwayspossible by pressing the key Einstellen orautomatically after 5 minutes without anykeystroke.

Deleting of switch times

If programmed switch times shall be deleted, thecorresponding weekdays must be deleted.For that, all weekdays are left out by touching thekey Ú, when programming the weekdays (see"Programming of weekdays).The switch-on andswitch-off times remain, but they will not beexecuted.

3.1.6.3 Types of operation

Manual Mode:

The dot indicates "Manuell" (Manual). Theshutter can be moved up or down by touching thekeys Ù or Ú. The relevant symbol appears in thedisplay.When the keys Ù or Ú are being pressed forapprox. 3s, the function is started after releasingthe key. This function is left after 2 minutes or bytouching any key. A change of the position of thelamellas is possible by touching the keys Ù or Ú(Touch operation

Einstellen Enter

Man/Auto

AutoManuell Zufall Astro

Tag Prog

DiMiDoFrSaSo

Mo

Woche

Figure: Operation mode "Manuell" (Manual)

Using this operation mode, programmed switchtimes will not be executed.

Automatic Mode:

You are able to change between Manual Modeand the previous set Automatic Mode by the keyMan/Auto.By pushing the key Enter after Man/Auto within 2s, the random generator and/or the Astro Modecan be selected by the key Ù or ÚConfirm selection with Enter.Now the selected mode is started and the switchtimes will be executed according to theprogramming.

Chap.: 3.1 Page: 8

Einstellen Enter

Man/Auto

AutoManuell Zufall Astro

Tag Prog

DiMiDoFrSaSo

Mo

Woche

Figure: Selecting the operation modes

Random generator:

The programmed times will vary up to ± 15minutes, if the random generator is switched tothe Automatic Mode. With that, all switch timesof the day will be changed to the same randomtime to avoid an overlapping of the shuttermovements.

Example:A random time of + 8 minutes has beendetermined for the present day. A switch timeprogrammed at 7.00 h will be executed at7.08 h. A switching at 22.00 is programmed atthe same day. It will be executed later with 8minutes, i.e. at 22.08 h. The reason is, that twoswitch times that follow just one after another(interval less than 15 minutes) shall not overlap.

A presence of persons can be simulated in thatmode, if the home is not occupied.

Astro Mode:

If blinds are requested to be opened at sunrise(SA) and to be closed at sunset (SU). In this casethe programmed switch times in the AutomaticMode have to be adapted continuously to theastronomical calendar.

By starting the Astro Mode, switch timesprogrammed within the dark period in themorning are executed at sun rise (SA). Switchtimes programmed within the dark period of theevening are executed at sunset (SA). For thatpurpose all times of sunset and sunrise arestored permanently in the Electronic Controllerfor Shutter and Blinds (see figures Times ofsunrise and Times of sunset in chapter 3.1.6.3)Switch times programmed within the brightnessof a day remain unchanged by the Astro Mode.

With it, it is reached, for example that shuttersand blinds are opened at the beginning of theday's brightness, but not before the morning's"getting-up time" that is set by the user program.Additionally shutter and blinds will be closed atthe end of the day's brightness, but no later thanthe "sleeping time" that is set by the userprogram.

Note: If Astro Mode is started, do not programmore than a maximum of one pair of switchtimes (i.e. 1 UP, 1 DOWN) per half day(morning/afternoon), as switching times ofdifferent switching time numbers within one halfday may delete themselves.

Example of an Astro Mode:An UP-time (AUF) is programmed at 6.30 h andthe Astro Mode is started.This time is exactly executed in thecalendarweeks 12 - 42, as the sun has risen atthis time. In the remaining calendarweeks thesun rises later. In this period the shutter isopened at the times, which are storedpermanently in the memory.

CW 2: executed UP time: 8.30 hCW 9: executed UP time: 7.20 hCW 44: executed UP time: 7.00 h

By means of the activated Astro Mode, it isprevented, that the blinds will be open beforesunrise.

A programmed DOWN-time of 19.10 h isadapted similarly:The programmed command (DOWN at 19.10) isexactly executed in the calendarweek 16-36, asthe sunset has not appeared (day's brightness).The sunset starts earlier in the remaining weeksof the year and the blind moves down accordingto the permanently stored times.

CW 2: executed DOWN time: 16.30 hCW 9: executed DOWN time: 17.50 hCW 44: executed DOWN time: 18.10 h

Note:If it is required to move shutters and blinds in thewhole year according to the astronomicalcalendar, the user has to set only one switchtime, which is in the darkness in the whole year,e.g. switch time "UP" =2.00 h, switch time"DOWN = 23.00 h

Chap.: 3.1 Page: 9

456789

10

5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50

15161718

2021

Darkness

Daylight

Darkness

Calendarweek

Time

19

Programmed UP-time 6.30 h

Programmed DOWN- 19.10 h

Executed UP-time

Executed DOWN-time

Figure: Example of an Astro Mode

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Jan. Jul. Dec.Apr. Oct.

Wintertime Summertime

CW

Figure: Times of the sunrise

Chap.: 3.1 Page: 10

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

Jan. Jul. Dec.Apr. Oct.

Wintertime Summertime

CW

Figure: Times of the sunset

Combination of Random andAstro Mode:

If Random Mode and Astro Mode are activated,switching times are adapted to the correspondingtimes of sunrise and sunset and varied with arandom time of up to ± 15 minutes.

Programming over the days

Normally a shutter or blind is moved up once perday and moved down once per day. Some timesan additional movement is desired at lunchtime.By that it is always required to use a combinationof one UP and one DOWN programming in theweekday. That is the reason, the Controller offersa combination of one UP and one DOWN time(e.g.1 Ù and 1 Ú) and only allows one weekdayfor both switch times.

In some rare cases it can be appear, that for thisboth connected movements different weekdaysare required.

Example:A company wishes to use a roll-up gate bymeans of the Electronic Controller for Shutterand Blinds. (Attention: Note the information aboutsafety in chapter 3.1.4. If the connected load of

the gate motor exceeds 1000 VA, relays arerequired for switching, see chapter 3.1.6.4)

The shift operation is working continuously fromMonday to Friday continuously, the roll-up gatehas to be closed at the weekend from Fridayevening 22.00 h to Monday morning 6.00 h.

In this case the common weekdays of the twoconnected switch times are objectionable. Butthis problem can be solved:

If a DOWN-command is programmed before anUP-command, the DOWN-command isineffective, when the roll-up gate has beenmoved down before.

In this example the Controller has to beprogrammed as in follows:

1 Ù: 06.00 h 1 Ù/Ú activate on Monday.1 Ú: 05.55 h (1 Ú is before 1 Ù!)2 Ù: 21.55 h 2 Ù/Ú activate for Friday2 Ú: 22.00 h

The following program is then executed:

The roll-up gate is moved up during the workingperiod.

Chap.: 3.1 Page: 11

On Friday at 21.55 h (end of the working week)an UP-command is generated, but is ineffective,as the roll-up gate is already in the UP-positionand no current is flowing by means of the finalswitches. At 22.00 h a DOWN-command isexecuted correctly. The roll-up gate is nowclosed.

The next command is a DOWN-command onMonday morning at 5.55 h. But it is not executed,because the roll-up gate is in the DOWN-position. Again the final switches prevent thecurrent flow in the motor.On Monday morning at 6.00 h the next UP-command is then correctly executed and the roll-up gate is moving up correctly. On the nextFriday the cycle will be repeated.

The programming over the days is also possiblewith the Electronic timer, described in chapter 2and it is probably used more frequently.

3.1.6.4 Connection of several motors inparallel

The control is designed for the connection of onmotor. If several motors are connected inparallel, in the switching moment back-voltagescan occur which could danger the motors. Thus,every motor has to be separated by means ofrelays or contactors.

Each single motor must be switched-off bymeans of final switches.

The maximum move time of approx. 2 minutes isguaranteed by the control of the contactors/relay.

The contactors and relays, respectively therecommended circuit (Figures Control of severalmotors (variant 1 and 2), have to be selectedaccording to the maximum switching power,which is required by the motors.

M1 M2

K1 K2

LN

N L

K1 K2

K1 K2

Figure: Control of several motors, variant 1

The switching power used in the shutter and blindcircuit can be calculated in the following:

Switch-on power of all contactors + power of allmotors = total power. This power may not exceedthe maximum power of the Electronic Controllerfor Shutter and Blinds (see technical data).

Formula:n x contactor power

+ n x motor power = power of the circuit

Example:

You have to control 6 motors at the same time.Every motor has a power of P = 100 VA.Contactors with 4 normally-open contacts eachare used. Switch-on power per contactor: P = 20VA.

Used contactors:Upwards: totally 6 contacts =

2 contactors (each witch 4 contacts)

Downward: totally 6 contacts =2 contactors (each witch 4 contacts)

Calculation of the power:Upwards: P = 6 x 100 VA + 2 x 20 VA

= 640 VADownwards: P = 6 x 100 VA + 2 x 20 VA

= 640 VA

The power of 100 VA per Controller is allowed,as is complies with the requirement.

M1 M2

K1 K2

LN

N L

K1 K2

K1 K2

Figure: Control of several motors, variant 2

The motors are directly supplied by the mains.Referring to the Controller, the powerconsumption is more favourable, as the power ofthe motor is not effective.

Chap.: 3.1 Page: 12

Installation of Separating relays

As very often a simultaneous control of severalmotors is required, but the installation ofcontactor circuits in distribution boards is tooenormous, small separating relays have beendeveloped. These relays fit "at site" in the flush-box or distributing box. They take over the taskto separate several shutter motors of up to3 - 5 A each and serve the possibility, to realizesingle and central control circuits.

At time different types of separating relays areoffered with the following connections:

a) for 1 motor and central control

b) for 1 motor, central control and single control

c) for 2 motors, central control and single control

The figure Application example with Separatingrelays shows a possible application of theseparating relay type b. With it, you can select,whether you install manual or electronicoperation elements for the central or singlecircuit.

Normally Separating relays address a higherpriority to the commands of a central circuit thanto the commands of the single circuit, due to itsinternal construction.This is necessary to prevent dangerous situations(short circuits), if the central and single controlare operating at the same moment.

Einstellen

Enter

Man/Auto

AutoManuell

Zufall Astro

Tag Prog

DiMiDoFrSaSo

Mo

Woche

Seperatingrelay

Central control Single control

M1 M3M2

Seperatingrelay

Single control

Seperating- relay

Single control

Mains3

22

3

4

332

Figure: Application Example with Separating relays

Chap.: 3.2 Page: 1

3.2 Electronic Timer3.2.1 GeneralThe Electronic Timer serves for the automaticswitching-on and off of electrical consumers,which are supplied with voltage by means of themains terminals.

It is possible to use an Electronic Timer invarious situations. Firstly, it can be named everykind of lighting control. But also other consumers,i.e. pumps of water fountains may be controlledby Electronic Timers, if the connected load willnot exceed 1000VA or contactors are installed forhigher power.

The Electronic Timer is very similar to theElectronic Controller for Shutter and Blindsdescribed in chapter 1. Only the five followingdifferences come into effect:

1.The Electronic Controller for Shutter and Blindshas two switch outputs with one relay each tocontrol the two shutter motor inputs. TheElectronic Timer contains only one switch outputto switch-on and -off the supply voltage of theconsumer. The figure Block structure of theElectronic Controller for Shutter and Blinds inchapter 3.1.1 applies also to the ElectronicTimer, if you mentally delete one of the twodrawn relays.

2.In the Automatic Mode the Electronic Controllerfor Shutter and Blinds always switches-on at theprogrammed times, either the function "UP or thefunction"DOWN" is executed. The switching-offis executed after 2 minutes automatically or bymeans of the motor final switches.

Against it, the Electronic Timer switches-on theconsumer at programmed times and switches-off,i.e. the operation time of the consumer is definedby the Electronic Timer.

3.The minimum time interval of 2 minutes betweentwo switch times is required using the ElectronicController for Shutter and Blinds, but is cancelledin the Electronic Timer. The Electronic Timer canbe programmed with time intervals of 1 minute.

4.The keys for manual operation are marked with Ù for "UP" or Ú "DOWN" on the ElectronicController for Shutter and Blinds. If the keys areshortly touched, the lamellas of the blinds can beadjusted. A longer touch causes the moving upor down of the blinds. If the touch time is longerthan 3 seconds, the function is locked and theblinds move to its final position, although the keyis released. In this mode the blind movement canbe stopped by means of pressing any desired keyThe keys for manual operation are marked with"EIN" (ON) and "AUS" (OFF) on the ElectronicTimer . A difference in the operation of touch andpermanent mode has not been realized becauseit is not requested.

5.The Astro Mode of Electronic Timer operates inthe opposite to the Astro Mode of the ElectronicController for Shutter and Blinds.All programmed switch times that are in thebright time of the morning of day, will beexecuted just at the time of the sunrise.Programmed switch times that are in the brighttime of the evening of day, will be reallyexecuted at the time of the sunset.

Reason:Normally an Electronic Timer switches-on a load(e.g. lighting) at the beginning of the darknessand it switches-off later in the night. This canonly be achieved by means of an inverted AstroMode compared with the Electronic Controller forShutter and Blinds.

Chap.: 3.2 Page: 2

Display and operation elements of Electronic Timer

Selection ofmanual/auto.mode

AutomaticO n

Time

D isplaySummert ime

D isplayW intertime

D isplayWeekday

Programswitch times

Adjusttime

Adjustcalendarweek

Adjustweekday

Summer-/wintertimeadjustment

ON

OFF

Switch time no.

Manual mode AutoManuell Zufall Astro

Tag Prog

D iMiD oFrSaSo

Mo

Woche

Einstellen Enter

Man/Auto

OFFON

Selection of adjustment mode Enter

Random modeO n

Astro modeO n

EIN AUS

O N

OFF

Figure: Display and operation elements of Electronic Timer

The programming is similar to the ElectronicController for Shutter and Blinds:It means:UP ( Ù ) = ONDOWN ( Ú ) = OFF

The remaining functions and features areidentical with those of the Electronic Controllerfor Shutter and Blinds, so the chapters

1.3 Technical construction1.4 Fitting and installation(For wiring, please see chapter 3.2.2)1.5 Initial set-up1.6 Operation1.6.2 Programming1.6.3 Types of operation1.6.4 Programming the days

are applied to the Electronic Timer and thefunction of the Electronic Timer have not to bedescribed separately. Nevertheless, theprogramming over days is explained by anexample which is specially thought for theElectronic Timer:

Example for programming over days:An outdoor lighting of the home shall be dailyswitched-on in the evening at 20.00 handswitched-off in the next morning at 6.00 h due tosafety reasons. A possible programming lookslike the following example:

1 Ù 20.00 h1 Ú 19.59 h

activate Mo (mon),Di(tue),Mi(wed),Do(thu),Fr(fri),Sa(sat), So(sun).(1 Ú is earlier than 1 Ù!)

2 Ù 05.59 h2 Ú 06.00 h

activate Mo (mon),Di(tue),Mi(wed),Do(thu),Fr(fri),Sa(sat), So(sun).

The following switching procedure is thencreated:At daytime the lighting is switched-off. At 19.59 hthe Timer executes an OFF-command. It has noeffect, because the installation is alreadyswitched-off. At 20.00 h the Timer executes anON-command, and the lighting is switched-on. Inthe next morning at 5.59 h the Timer executes anON-command, but it has no effect, as the lightingis already switched-on. At 6.00 h the Timerexecutes an OFF-command, the lighting isswitched-off. With it, the requested switchingbehaviour is achieved.

But note, that a mixture of programming overdays and the manual switching-on and off maycreate undesired states by means of overlappingswitch times. Referring to the above example, ifthe lighting is switched-on at 19.00 h during theactive program, a dark phase will occur from19.50 h to 20.00 h.

Chap.: 3.2 Page: 3

3.2.2 Installation:Use the following wiring diagram to connect theElectronic Timer:

NL1

max. 1000VA

N

Figure: Wiring diagram Electronic Timer

Attention, information about safety:The Electronic Timer is designed for theautomatic switching of lighting. If it is used forother purposes creating danger (i.e. heating orcooking devices), the user has to exclude thisdanger by means of installing additional safetymeasures.

Chap.: 3.3 Page: 1

3.3 Graphical presentation of the operation menu

The operation which is described in chapter 3.1.6can be explained by means of graphicalpresentation, as it shown on the next pages.

The graphic is suitable for those users, whichhave learned the operation of the Controller andonly need some small information to program theController without problems.

PROGRAMMIERUNG

Start Adjustment Mode

START

Einstellen Enter

Presentcalendarday(CW)

Einstellen

Finish program:(within 2 sec.)

Enter

alter

confirm

Einstellen

Finish program:

Presentweekday

Enter

alter

confirm

Einstellen

Finish program:

Presenttime

Enter

alter

confirm

Einstellen

Finish program:

Summer/wintertime

Enter

alter

confirm

Einstellen

Finish program

(next page)

Chap.: 3.3 Page: 2

Switch time number

Enter

alter

confirm

Einstellen

finish program

UP-time

Enter

alter

confirm

Einstellen

finish program

DOWN-time

Enter

alter

confirm

Einstellen

finish program

Switchweekday

Enter

confirm

confirm

Einstellen

finish program

Enter

displayedswitch weekday

confirm cancel

all weekdaysare programmed

run foreachweekday

EndAdjustment mode

END, jump to Normal Mode

return to"switch time number"

all switch timesare programmed

not all switch times are programmed

Jump fromthe "EndAdjustmentmode"

(from the previous page)

Chap.: 3.3 / 3.4 Page: 3

START Operation Mode - Selection

Start OperationModeSelection

Enter (within 2 sec.)Man/Auto

Operation modeSelection

Enter

alter

confirm

End OperationModeSelection

automatic jumpto Normal Mode

3.4 Technical dataThe technical data, described here, have beenup-to-date, when the Electronic Handbook waspublished. We receive the right to change thetechnical data and, the technical data are no

more valid in case of changes. As the technicaldata are always up-to-date in the operatinginstructions, which are delivered with theproduct, in important cases the operatinginstruction should be taken for decision.

Parameter: Electronic Controller for Shutterand Blinds :

Electronic Timer:

Rated voltage: 230 V +6%, -10%, 50HzNeutral conductor required !

Rated load: max. 1 Motor 1000 VA max. 1000 VATime-keeping quality: ± 1 min./monthOperation reserve: approx. 2 hoursSwitch times: 9 "UP"- and "DOWN"-times eachShortest period betweenswitch times:

2 minutes between twomovements

1 minute between twoswitching operations

Random Generator: max. ± 15 min.Astro Mode: internal memory for the times of sunrise and sunsetRelay output: 2 NOC 1 NOCSwitch pulse duration: approx.. 2 minutes programmable by the userConnection: screw clamps for max. 2.5 mm 2

Self consumption: < 2WFuse: T 6.3A / 250 DAmbient temperature: -10°C to + 40°C

Chap.: 4.1 / 4.2 Page: 1

4. Electronic transformer

4.1 ApplicationMore and more in modern light architecturelightings with low-voltage lamps are used.These lamps require an operating voltage of12 V (some need 24 V) and are offered with anelectrical power from 5 W to 100 W. The 230 Vvoltage has to be transformed to 12 V to supplythe lamps with power by the mains. Transformerssupport this. These should supply mostly morelamps, so that they are designed for powersbetween 50 W and 500W (in steps).Conventional iron core transformers with 50 Hzare installed for these powers. In the power rangeup to 200 W electronic transformers areincreasingly used due to several advantages.

Main advantages are:− low-noise operation− electronic short circuit protection, e.g. never

change a fuse again!− after solving the short circuit automatic re-

start− protection against overload− softstart with no peaks ensures a longer lamp

lifetime− overtemperature protection, automatic power

reduction− protection against open circuit− high efficiency− less weight and compact construction− able to be repaired− able to be dimmed by means of TRONIC -

dimmer of the TRONIC Lighting controlsystem e.g. low-noise dimming of loads up to7.7 kW by means of one push button!

− operation at 230 V DC voltage (emergencyinstallations) complying to all protectionfunction is possible with special devices.

4.2 PrincipleIt was the aim to design transformers as smalland compact as possible and this was achievedby following realization: The volume (V) of awound transformer is reverse proportional to thefrequency (f) of the transformed voltage:

V~1/f

Following that, a high-frequency voltage can betransformed by a smaller transformer, if thesame conditions are effective.To it, before the transformation the 50 Hz mainsvoltage has to be transformed into an alternatingvoltage with high frequency.That is simply solved by "cutting" the mains volt-age periodically with a high frequency. Electronicswitches are used for that.We are calling them electronic transformer/switch power supplies (SNT) or abbreviated"TRONIC-transformers", to distinguish from theconventional transformers or power supplies.

In the figure Principle of electronic transformersthe switch power supply is illustratedschematically. The 50 Hz mains voltage isrectified. In the following the direct currentconverter "cuts" the voltage with a highfrequency of approx. 40 kHz. This is done byelectronic switches, which interrupt rhythmicallythe voltage supply of the load. The ON-time andthe OFF-time are fixed to the values. Thus, theduty cycle is 1:1. A high rectangular voltage isoffered behind the converter, which has been setonto the desired value by the transformer.

Low-voltage halogen lamps can be operatedeither by DC or by AC voltage. TRONIC-transformers offer an output alternating voltagewith a RMS-value of U = 11.7 V. The frequencyis approx. 40 kHz.

Rectifier

Mains

Converter

Lamps

Transformer

100 Hz 40 kHz

U UU UN B a

40 kHz

t tt

50 Hz

t

Figure: Principle of electronic transformers

Chap.: 4.3 Page: 1

Mains FuseRFISupp-ression

Rectifier

Over-voltageprotection

Overtemperatureprotection

Converter

Protectionagainstshort circuit

Halogen lamps

Figure: TRONIC-transformer, block circuit

4.3 Specification of TRONIC-transformers

4.3.1 Block circuitIn the figure TRONIC-transformer, block circuit,the following function blocks are presented:

Fuse:It is often designed as a fuse-resistor inTRONIC-transformers. It protects theinstallation, if faults will occur in the TRONIC-transformer. If the primary current increases toan inadmissible value by means of a componentfailure, it disconnects the transformer from themains. Short-circuits or overloads have noeffects on the TRONIC-transformer, as this isregulated by the protection against short-circuits.

Radio frequency suppression:The block RFI suppression consists of a L-C-network, and serves for the attenuation of themains interferences, which are generated at anyswitching process. So they are also generatedby the TRONIC-transformer and the RFIsuppression removes those parts from the mainsthat are caused by the switching frequency andby their harmonics on the transformer operatingvoltage .

Rectifier:The rectifier transfers the mains voltage intopulsing direct voltage. There is no respectively asmall filtering, the voltage can be seen in thefigure Principle of electronic transformers. Thusa dimming without external dimmer respectivelya regulation of the overtemperature is possible.After each half wave the circuit has to be firedagain, the well-known principle of the phase-cut-on dimmer is applied. The realization of thecircuit is roughly drawn up in the figure Basiccircuit of the TRONIC-transformer (details see atthe point Converter)

Overvoltage protection:A varistor in parallel to the rectifier supports theprotection against mains transients.

Converter:The DC voltage (exacter: the frequency pulsingwith 100Hz) is transformed to a high frequencyrectangular voltage and to 12 V.It is built as a "Half-bridge flow converter". Thenaming half-bridge is referring to the position ofthe electronic switches (transistors T1/T2) in thefigure Basic circuit TRONIC-transformer. Thesecond half-bridge is formed by the twocapacitors Cs. If the capacitors are replaced bytransistors, a full-bridge is designed.

R

C

D

T1

T2

Tr

Cs

Cs

UB

Di

Converter

230 V~

Figure: Basic circuit of TRONIC-transformer

Chap.: 4.3 Page: 2

"Flow" is referring to the energy transfer to theload in the conductive phase of the switchingtransistors. In contrast to that, a "Block converter"transfers the energy to the load in its non-conductive phase. In this process the energy hasto be stored in an inductance. The complexcontrol circuit is not shown in the figure Basiccircuit of the TRONIC-transformer. It controlsalternatively the switching of T1 and T2.

Operation of the converter:By means of the resistor R, the capacitor C ischarged up to the turn-on value of the diac DI.Then the diac is turned-on, and it switches-on thetransistor and the converter. The time constant T= R x C determines the time tz and, with it, thelamp brightness. If R is designed as apotentiometer, a dimming is possible.

In the practical realization R is divided. Onecomponent is a temperature dependent resistor(PTC = resistor with Positive TemperatureCoefficient) and this serves for theovertemperature regulation (BlockOvertemperature protection in the figureTRONIC-transformer, block circuit)

The value of R and the time constant increasedue to temperature rises in case of overload orinadmissible ambient temperatures. The timebecomes longer, the output voltage is reduced.So the temperature values in the transformer arestabled and an overheating is countered. Theregulation is a proportional regulation.

Simply described:The converter is a self-oscillating circuit, whichoffers a high-frequency (HF) rectangular voltage.The switch frequency lies above the hear limit (16kHz), so no acoustic is occurring. The transformertransforms the voltage to the required value. Italso serves for the galvanic separation of theprimary and the secondary side (Test voltage:Peak 4240 V) and for the protection againstelectrical shock.

Short circuit protection:In case of a short-circuit of the lamps thetransformer and the mains are protected by aninternal electronic protection circuit and theoutput is switched-off within fewer milliseconds.This is why a wire-fuse is not required.If a short-circuit appears, the charging of thecapacitor is avoided by an additional circuit. Thediac does not turn-on, the converter can notoscillate. The short-circuit current only flows ashort time and a damage of the components isexcluded. After solving the short-circuit, anautomatic re-start is effective.

Overtemperature protection:Overtemperatures occur by means of exceedingthe permissible ambient temperature or by meansof an overload. The TRONIC-transformerscontain an overtemperatur protection. Thetemperature existing in the transformer iscontrolled by a regulation circuit and the poweroutput is automatically reduced from a given limiton. This power regulation leads to a heat level inthe TRONIC-transformer and prevents a defect ofthe device by means of overvoltage temperature.The connected LV-lamps are turned to a reducedbrightness in this state. If this automatic reductionof the lamps' brightness is recognized, a lowerambient temperature or a reduced load should berealized. Thus the original brightness of thelamps and a relieving of the transformer isachieved. A detailed description was given under"Converter".

4.3.2 Output voltageA high frequency voltage is applied to the lamp:

10 ms

t

tZ

25 µs

Ua

t

Figure: Output voltage of the TRONIC-transformer

The amount of the RMS value is decisive toselect the main data of the lamp (see figureVoltage dependence of the lamp data).Usually the value is selected which is laid down at11.5 V to 12.0 V in case of the rated load of thetransformer and at the nominal mains voltage.The light efficacy is reduced in fact, but thelamp's lifetime increases, e.g. at 11.5 V toapprox. 170 %. The TRONIC-transformer offersan output voltage of 11.7 V. The voltage isproportional to the mains voltage deviations.

Chap.: 4.3 Page: 3

Halogen lamp

140

130

120110

100

80

60

40

30

25

U [V]12,0 12,6 13,211,410,8

P

I

LP

I

L

= Luminance flux, P = Power, = Light efficiacy, I = Lamp current, L = Lifetime

I / Io

, P

/ P

o,

/

o,

/

o

, L

/ Lo

[%

]

400

300

200

150

100

90

80

70

Figure: Voltage dependence of the lamp data

Load driftings have fewer influences. A reductionof the load of 50% increases the output voltage toapprox. 3%. A minimum load has to be de-termined due to this influences. The rated volt ageis not exceeded and so the lamp "lives" longer.A further requirement to the minimum load is thesafety against open circuit operation of theTRONIC-transformer. Underload may lead toflickering.

Measuring the output voltage:The output voltage is to measure only by meansof especially selected instruments! The mobileFluke 8060A is a suitable instrument, easy to usein comparison to the instruments only used inlaboratories.A rough measurement is the correlation meas-urement of the illuminance of the same lampsupplied by a known DC or 50 Hz AC supply. Thetransformer has to operate in its load range.

Measuring:The illuminance of a lamp connected to a trans

former is detected by a luxmeter, additional lightis avoided. The value is registered. In the follow-ing, the lamp is to be supplied by a variable DCpower supply. The arrangement of the lamp andthe luxmeter is not changed. The DC voltage isadjusted up to the value that is corresponding tothe lux-value. The DC value is registered. It isidentical to the RMS-value of the HF-voltage.

In the actual practise, it is sufficient to test theburning of the lamp by means of a test lamp (U =12 V, power in the allowed range of the trans-former).

4.3.3 Secondary wireHarmonics (numeral multiple of the switch fre-quency) may be radiated as electromagneticwaves. This is the reason the length of the lampwire may not exceed 2m to guarantee the radiofrequency suppression.That is required by the VDE if an approval isgiven and it is the user's advantage. The correctwiring is shown in the following figure.

Mains

Mains

TRONIC-tarns.

TRONIC-trans.

a)

b)

Mains TRONIC-trans.

c)

d)

Mains TRONIC-trans.

Figure: Wiring of TRONIC-transformers

Chap.: 4.3 Page: 4

The secondary wire of several lamps should belaid far away as possible from the mains wires.

You have to pay attention on the flowing currentand the allowed voltage drop (brightnessreduction), when selecting the secondary wire.As electronic transformers operate with afrequency of approx. 40 kHz, the voltage drop isnot only depending on the wire length, wire cross-section and conductivity of the wire material, butalso on the kind of cabling (e.g. two-core wire,twisted single core wire, single core in a ring ).Additionally the current is not flowing equally inthe cross-section, it is shifted from the wire centerto the wire surface(Skin effect).

These facts have been taken into account in thefollowingInformation about selection of the secondarywire:

− The wire length required by the VDE may notexceed a maximum of 2 m.

− Please select the wire cross-section adaptedto the lamp power from the following table.

Lamp power per wire Cross- sections≤ 60 W

65 - 105 W110 - 150 W

≥ 1.0 mm²≥ 1.5 mm²≥ 2.5 mm²

− The power according to the table has to beseparated on several wires, if a lamp power ofmore than 150 W per TRONIC-transformer isconnected. Some transformers containmultiple terminals and in fact, they should beused.

− A two-core wiring causes a smaller voltagedrop than an out-going and a back-comingsingle-core wire. However, if single core wireshave to be installed, they should be twisted tominimize the voltage drop.

− Separating the wire at the transformer'sterminals (instead separating at the lamps),reduces the voltage drop furthermore, whenthe same wire cross-section is installed, seeWiring of TRONIC-transformer . A 6-waydistributor is offered to achieve the optimumdistribution.

The relation of voltage drop and reduction of theluminous flux can be seen in the figure R eductionof the luminous flux of lamps

LV halogen lamps

allowed reduction of luminous flux [%]

Vol

tage

dro

p [V

]

1,2

1,0

0,8

0,6

0,4

0,2

0 5 10 15 20 25 30

Figure: Reduction of the luminous flux of lamps

4.3.4 Switch-on behaviourCold lamps have a very low resistance. If thetransformer is switched-on, at the moment of ahigh voltage, a high current will flow for a certaintime. The switch-on current of incandescentlamps rises up to ten times of the rated current.The switch-on time is determined to 40 ms.Halogen lamps have a switch-on time up to 300ms and switch-on currents up to 10 times of therated current.The figure Switch-on behaviour of transformersshows the differences of the RMS-currents, if aLV-halogen lamp is switched-on by means of a50 Hz transformer and a TRONIC-transformer.You can see, that the LV-halogen lamp is loadedwith an essentially higher current connected to a50 Hz transformer than using a TRONIC-transformer

300

Ratedcurrent

I RMS

t [ms]

50 Hz - transformer

TRONIC-transformer

Figure: Switch-on behaviour of transformers

This start being gentle to lamps is achieved bymeans of a delayed switching-on of theconverter. This switch-on behaviour (also called"softstart") guarantees a long life time of theconnected lamps.

The delay time, which is effective by the softstartwhen the lamp starts burning, may be up tomaximum 2 seconds. It depends on the loading

Chap.: 4.3 Page: 5

of the transformer, the used lamp type, thefeature of the installed network and on the use ofa TRONIC-dimmer.It is hardly to recognize innormal installations.

4.3.5 Connecting TRONIC-transformers together

It is only allowed to connect the TRONIC-transformers in parallel on the primary side, e.g.for a dimmer installation, see figure ConnectingTRONIC-transformer together. It is not sensible toconnect them in series. On the secondary side aconnection neither in parallel nor in series isallowed!

TRONIC-Dimmer

Mains

TRONIC-trans.

TRONIC-Dimmer

TRONIC-trans.

Mains

TRONIC-trans.

TRONIC-trans.

Figure: Connecting TRONIC-transformers together

4.3.6 InstallationTransformers operate with low acoustic noise.Nevertheless, they should be mounted on a non-vibrating base, so no resonances may occur.

Transformers, marked with the MM-sign, areallowed to be fitted into wooden furniture, as theycreate only small temperature in case of a defectand create no danger of fire. Therefore, nospecial requirements on the mounting base areset referring to the danger of fire. But minimumrequirements are set to meet reliably this feature.A certain size of the mounting room is necessary.The minimum distances between the transformerand the ambient can be taken from the drawing ofthe operating instructions:

[ mm ]x x

y

Figure: Minimum distances of transformer mounting

If you want to check whether the transformer isoverheated under certain mounting conditions,the generated overtemperature at permanentoperation (2-3h) must be measured.The measure point is the hottest point on thetransformer housing (and not the transformer'senvironment). That one is marked by a smallround point and signed as Tc-point (Tc =Temperature Case) with the corresponding,maximum allowed temperature. If thetemperature stays below the specified allowedlimit also in permanent operation, the transformeris operating under specified conditions. In suchcase, an evaluation of the ambient temperature isno more necessary.

4.3.7 Dimmer operationA dimmer may be pre-connected on the primaryside of the transformer to control the brightness.One dimmer can control several transformers.The sum of the transformers' power shall notexceed the allowed dimmer power.

Normally conventional "phase-cut-on" dimmersare not suitable for dimming electronictransformers. Often humming or flickering of thelight may occur.This is the reason to use "phase-cut-off" dimmer,the TRONIC-dimmer.

Use only Tronic-dimmer for dimming TRONIC-transformers.For details, see chapter 1.

4.3.8 Operation at DC-voltageBuildings that need a continuous, non-interruptedpower supply, e.g. hospitals, are often installedwith emergency power plants. In case of mainsfailure, those devices supply the installation witha DC current of 230 V, to guarantee anemergency operation. The electrical devices ofthis installation have to operate with both 230 VAC as 230 V DC

The design of the electronic transformer ensuresan operation at 230 V DC in principle, as thedevices contain a rectifier circuit in the input (seechapter 4.2). The output voltage would have aconstant frequency of approx. 40 kHz and aconstant amplitude. Such an operation is notallowed (except SNT 200), because theprotection features of the device are onlyeffective in the AC operation (short circuitprotection, overtemperature protection andoverload protection). These devices needinternally the pulsing DC voltage, which is onlyoffered by the 230V AC

Chap.: 4.3 Page: 6

Protection functions have been realized, whenthe TRONIC-transformer SNT 200 was designed.This transformer does need the internal pulsingdirect voltage and is suitable for the installation inDC networks. Complying to all protectionfunctions, this device can be installed in networkswith 230V DC, as shown in the figure TRONIC-transformer in emergency power plants. Asdimmers are not able to be operated at directcurrent DC, however the TRONIC-transformerSNT 200 is only dimmable in AC networks.

230 V Batteries

TRONIC-trans.SNT 200

Emergency power plant+

-

LN

230 V

230 V

=

Figure: TRONIC-transformer in emergency power plants

Chap.: 4.4 Page: 1

tt

Switchprocess

OFF

ONind. load

TRONIC-trans.

false ! correct !

OFF

ON

Figure: Switching of mixed installation at different times

4.4 Overvoltage protection in LV-installations

The mains voltage has a value of 230 V with atolerance +6% and -10%. If inductive loads (e.g.conventional ballasts of fluorescent lamps or highpressure mercury lamps) are switched in themains, overvoltage pulses (so-called "spikes")are generated. These occur only at tiny fractionsof a second, but voltage values rise up to 1000V.TRONIC-dimmer and TRONIC-transformer areresistant against these mains spikes according toEN 61047 and EN 61000-4-4/5. In thesestandards an immunity of the device is requiredagainst mains spikes of 1000 V between L and Nand mains spikes of 2500 between L/N and PE

This immunity against overvoltage is achieved bymeans of a varistor in the input stage of thetransformer, as shown in chapter 4.3.1. If thevalues of the mains spikes exceed this limits,damage of the devices are no more excluded.This is the reason, TRONIC-transformer shouldnot be operated in one common load circuit with

inductive loads, but TRONIC-transformers andinductive loads should be connected to separatephases.

An improvement of the situation just appears, ifthe various consumers are switched at differenttimes, see figure Switching of mixed installationat different times. If it is ensured (e.g. by meansof time delay switches) that inductive loads areonly switched, when the TRONIC-transformersare switched-off and separated galvanically,mains spikes will not arrive at the TRONIC-transformer directly.

The overvoltage protection module (chapter6.4.2) contains also a varistor, a voltagedependent resistor, which is low-resistive in caseof a high-voltage pulse and shorts this pulse(detailed information about the varistor, seechapter 6.3.2 ). A clean area is built up behindthe module. Up to 10 TRONIC-transformers canbe protected by using the module (see followingfigure).

LN

LN

Figure: Installation of the overvoltage module

Chap.: 4.4 Page: 2

The module should be installed as close aspossible to the transformer, to ensure theoptimum effect. If a TRONIC- dimmer isinstalled, the overvoltage protection module hasnot to be installed in front of the TRONIC-transformer or the TRONIC-transformers, but infront of the TRONIC-dimmer to protect also theTRONIC-dimmer. Moreover the installationbetween dimmer and transformer would createan additional danger, as the mains spike isapplied with its total amount to the dimmer only.

Mains spikes can be inductively coupled fromone wire to another. This is the reason to avoidthe parallel cabling of the protected wire and thenon-protected wire. The effect of the modulewould be reduced, see figure Wire installationusing the overvoltage protection module.

The discharge capacity of the overvoltageprotection module is not sufficient in case ofsevere overvoltages (direct lightning strike orsimilar events). The varistor of the overvoltageprotection module can be destroyed. Then anintegrated temperature switch disconnects themodule permanently from the mains. Aneffective protection against such events can onlybe achieved by installing a basic protection in the

main distribution board and a medium-levelprotection in the sub-distribution board (seechapter 6.5). In this context, the overvoltageprotection module can be classified as a part ofthe detailed protection, see figure Overvoltageprotection module, one component of a protectionconcept

SD

SD

MD

Medium-level protection

Basic protection

Detailed protection

Medium-level protection

Figure: Overvoltage protection module, one component of a protection concept

Coupling of spikes

e.g. duct

wrong !

e.g.duct

correct !

Coupling of spikes

Figure: Wire installation using the overvoltage protection module

Chap.: 5.1 / 5.2 Page: 1

5. Current guard for control of low voltage rope and pole systems

By means of the availability of the low voltagelamps the lighting designer was able to createattractive, non-isolated power feeders in ropeand pole systems. A dangerous current throughthe human body is not possible, if the blankpower feeders are touched, as the voltage is atthe low level of 12 V and the system is isolatedfrom the mains. Inductive transformers are ofteninstalled due to the long secondary wire of thislighting systems which are normally longer than 2meters.

5.1 Danger and safety requirementsof rope and pole system

The danger appears, if the transformer or thecurrent feeders are overheated by means of theconnection of too many lamps or by means of ashort-circuit in the lamp circuit. Even a metalliccoat hanger can generate a short-circuit, if it ishung on the non-isolated current feeders.

Electronic protection circuits have beendeveloped to avoid the danger and they aremonitoring the power of the lamp circuit. Theyswitch-off the lamp circuit, if the power is alteringfrom a specified value.

In the draft standards DIN VDE 0100 Part 559(Installation standard) and 0711 Part 500 (Lampstandard) these protection devices have beenrequired for low voltage lightings with multiplepole, non-isolated power feedings.

The protection device has to switch-off the lampcircuit in case of power changes of more than ±30W in the lamp circuit according to the draftstandard DIN VDE 0100 Part 559 A2.

It is also required to switch-off the lamp circuit atreduced load (-30W). This results of the potentialdanger appearing, if a low voltage lamp fails andthe not used power flows away from theprotection device across a dangerous path. It isalso possible that the a single low voltagehalogen lamp is connected, this fails and the userbelieves, the installation is switched-off and acurrent path was opened with non-flammablematerial.

5.2 Current guardThe current guard developed by INSTA is aprotection device according to draft standard

DIN VDE 0100 Part 559. It is designed for theprimary side of conventional transformers, as theload conditions in the lamp circuit can betransferred to the primary side of the transformerand two advantages exist compared with thesecondary side:

1. In case of failure a current less than 20 timesmust be switched-off.

2. The current guard may be installed at thatplace, where it can be operated conveniently.

300 W250 W

200 W

150 W

100 W 50 W Reset

230 V~12 VL1

N

Figure: Current guard

5.2.1 Function− The current guard switches-off permanently

the lamp circuit of the installation at short-circuit, overload and reduced load.

− The current guard is installed between mainsand transformer (see figure Current guard).Mains voltage deviations are detected andcompensated by the current guard. They donot influence the switching behaviour of thecurrent guard.

− If the current guard is adjusted, the adjustedtotal power of the lighting system (see chapter5.2.2) may exceed the total lamp power a littlebit, because the current guard also monitorsthe power losses of the transformer and thewires. That does not cause anydisadvantages.If soft-iron E-cores are used, the value of thelamp load should lie in the range of the rated

Chap.: 5.2 Page: 2

power of the transformer to guarantee anoptimum switching of the current guard. Thereason is, if transformers with soft-iron E-coreare only loaded with a small load, it is notpossible to transfer exactly the conditions ofthe secondary side to the primary side.

− The current guard is a protection device forthe secondary current circuit. In case of ashort-circuit between current guard andtransformer on the primary side, the currentguard is switched-off permanently by meansof a safety resistor, however this has to berepaired in the factory.

Explanations of the Principle circuit Currentguard:

The switching-on of the mains and the reset key(1) have the same function: They reset theadjustment stage (2), i.e. the adjustment time of1.6 sec starts and the relay closes the contact K(3) and lets the current flow to the transformerand the lamps.

If a short-circuit should exist in the lamp circuitduring this initial phase, the short-circuitdetection (4) will quickly disconnect the lampcircuit.

The comparator (5), which has been adjusted tothe lamp load by means of a potentiometer,

operates after the adjustment time of 1.6seconds.

It detects, if the values of the currentmeasurement (6) and the values of the voltagemeasurement (7) will change into an oppositedirection. It transmits a value to the evaluationstages (8-10), which are proportional to the loadvariation.

If the measured load variation is within the range ∆P = + 5 W to + 25 W, the evaluation stage (8)triggers by turning-on theLED 1. If a reduced load of ∆P = - 5 W to - 25 Wis detected, the evaluation stage (9) sets the LED2.

If the load variation should exceed the tolerance ∆P = ± 25 W, the contact K is openedpermanently by the evaluation stage (10) and therelay stage (3), and the load circuit is switched-off.

After solving of the load variation or afteradjusting the current guard onto a new loadvalue, the lighting can put into operation bymeans of the reset key or by means of switching-off and -on the mains by a light switch.

Connecting the current guard, the line (L) and theneutral conductor (N) of the transformer are ledthrough the current guard.

Trans.L

N230 V

Load variation >+ 5W

Load variation >- 5W

Load variation > +/- 25W

Short-circuit detection

Adjustment stage

Relay

Voltage measurement(Compensation ofmain deviations)

Current measurements

Initial/Reset function

K open

(Prio. 3)

Comparator

Rmeas

LED1

LED2

K open

(Priority 2)

(Priority 1)

K close(1) (2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)(8)

(9)

(10)

Sar

t-up

func

tion

Ope

ratin

g fu

nctio

ns

K

Figure: Principle circuit Current guard

Chap.: 5.2 Page: 3

5.2.2 Operating the current guard− Determine the total power before adjusting

and pre-select on the scale. If the value doesnot fit, it is switched-off within 1.6 seconds.

− Start by the RESET key. When the pre-selected value is correct, continue with thefine adjustment. The potentiometer has to beturned into the direction of the shining LEDuntil both LEDs switch-off (center of thewindow). Now the device reacts onto loadvariations of ± 25 W

− After the tripping of the current guard, youhave to search the reason for the fault (e.g.reduced load by means of a lamp defect) andremove it.

− Re-start by using the RESET key or byswitching-off and on the installation.

Recommendation:

The lamp current alters after a certain time afterswitching-on due to the physics of the lamp.That's why the adjustment should be tested afterone minute. When one LED shines again, a re-adjustment is to be executed in the direction ofthe shining LED.

5.2.3 Combination of dimmer or TRONIC-transformer

An operation of dimmers and current guard inone circuit leads to malfunctions, as the dimmeroperation causes power variations in the loadcircuit.

A combined operation of the current guard and aTRONIC-transformer in the same circuit must notbe planned, as the TRONIC-transformer containsits own protection components. But it can beinstalled, if a deviation of ± 25 W from the ratedvalue is required.

Chap.: 6.1 Page: 1

6. Electronic ballast for Miniature Fluorescent lamps

An essential step to smaller solutions has beenachieved in the innovation of new fluorescenttubes. The new miniature fluorescent lamps,marked as "FM" (fluorescent miniature) or also"T2" have only a tube diameter of 7 mm and alamp power of 6W-13W!

Since the lamps possess additionally excellentvalues of efficacy and brilliance, besides of theirinteresting size, new application fields andpossibilities for an economic and lighting witheffects can be realized in display cases, shopwindows and shelves, furniture, galleries andparty rooms.

6.1 Physics of the FM- lampThe basic principle of the fluorescent lamps havebeen described in chapter 1.4.1.3 and can beread again there.

The best available luminescent material is usedmanufacturing a FM-lamp to meet the highrequirements. These so-called three-bandluminescent materials stand for a high efficiacy,good colour rendering property and a small lossof luminous flux.Similar to all other fluorescent lamps, FM-lampsemit also a small, non-critical radiation in the UV-range and this is approx. 60-80 microwatt perlumen. This is also the same value ofincandescent lamps. This low UV-portions aretotally harmless to the user in normal use. Theradiation only rises up to 1/15 of the value of asunburn measured after 8 h and 1000 lx. But youshould pay attention on the fact, that FM-lampswith cover should be installed, if very light-sensitive, valuable exhibits are lighted, e.g.pictures in museums, to avoid the bleaching ofthe colours.

The features of the miniature fluorescent lampare dependent on the temperature, similar to allother fluorescent lamps. So both, the colourtemperature of the emitted light (see figureColour temperature of the FM-lamp) and theemitted luminous flux (with that the brightness ofthe lamp) are varying depending on the ambienttemperature (see figure Luminous flux of the FM-lamp).

3400

3200

3000

2800

2600

2400

Col

our t

empe

ratu

re (K

)

Tube temperature (°C)0 20 40 60 80

Figure: Colour temperature of a FM-lamp

120

100

80

60

40

20

00 20 40 60

Lum

inou

s flu

x (%

)

Ambient temperature(°C)

Figure: Luminous flux of the FM-lamp

The most important features are summarised inthe following:

− Wattage: 6, 8, 11, 13 W− Colour temperature: Warm DELUX 183-830

White DELUX 184-840further under consideration

− Colour temperature: 3000K (WWX)4000K (CWX)

− Colour rendering property: Level 1B− Lamp length: 218 - 523 mm− Luminous flux: 310 - 860 lm− Efficiacy: 52- 67 lm / W− MTBF: 8000 h− Lampholder system : W4.3− Operating system: Electronic ballast with

pre-heating andsafety switch-off

At present, the lamps are not suitable fordimming, independent on the Electronic ballast.

Chap.: 6.2 / 6.3 Page: 1

6.2 The technology of the Electronic ballast for ML

Operation principle:

After switching-on the Electronic ballast starts theignition process of the lamp. At first theelectrodes of the lamp are pre-heated to achievea softstart (gentle to the lamps) to ensure a longlamp lifetime. The pre-heating phase takes about0.5...1 second.

Afterwards the output voltage which is set ot themains potential, is increased. It may reach valuesof a few 100 Vpp, in case of a lamp defectmaximum 1500 Vpp. If the lamp is started, theoutput voltage breaks down to the burningvoltage of 50 to 180 Vrms, dependent on thelamp type and mains voltage. The steady-state isthen reached.

Overtemperature of the lamp, lamp ageing,"false starts", too large current in the lamp orbroken filaments are dangerous operatingconditions, which will result in a lamp overheatingand with it, the mercury-filled glass tube wouldmelt. These dangerous conditions are detected atthe output of the Electronic ballast by means ofthe voltage and current values. The Electronicballast switches-off the current through theluminaire, just before damages may appear.

The lamp circuit is not galvanically isolated andmains potential is still staying at the lampholdersin the switch-of state. The lamp can be startedagain by means of exchanging the lamp and bya short interruption (minimum 1 second) of thepower supply of Electronic ballast . The normaloperation is then running.

The output voltage is not a safety extra lowvoltage (SELV), but a voltage on mains potential.During the start-up phase, it may rise to anignition voltage of 1500 Vpp

The installation on the lamp side (lampholdersand wires) must be isolated according to that.Current-carrying parts are not allowed to betouched, to avoid an electrical shock.

6.3 Device variants:8 variants of the Electronic ballast for MiniatureFluorescent lamps are offered. These variantsconsist of 4 wattage levels 6W, 8W, 11W and13W and of the two housings ,a cubic and acylindrical one.

They have hardly no differences referring to itselectrical circuit. But they are tuned to thespecific wattage in operation and with it, theelectronic has designed slightly different. TheElectronic ballast for Miniature Fluorescent lampsare designed for use in operation with one singlelamp of one wattage

The wiring of the Electronic ballast for MiniatureFluorescent lamps is shown in the followingfigure:

S

LN

LN

Lam

p / t

ube

min

iatu

re

AC 230 V ~

Electronic ballast for ML

Figure: Wiring of the cubic Electronic ballast for Miniature Fluorescent lamps

LNAC 230 V ~

Lam

p / t

ube

min

iatu

re

grey

white

Electronicballast for ML

Figure: Wiring of the cylindrical Electronic ballast for Miniature Fluorescent lamps

Chap.: 6.3 Page: 2

Figure: Cubic housing Electronic ballast ML

As it already described, the FM-lamp is notdimmable.

The cubic housing:

It consists of polycarbonat „PC“, which may berecycled. As you can see in the figure Cubichousing Electronic ballast ML, the housing maybe installed by means of both the screw holeson the housing bottom and the screw holes onthe housing side.

The pull-relief on the mains side is designed toensure the effective relief of round wires. If flat-wires of the type H05VV-F 2x0,75 shall berelieved from pull, break the clamping-insertmoulded at the pull-relief cap

Flat wire

Break

Figure: Insert at the cubic housing

and fit it into the housing bottom and then insertthe flat wire.

At the lamp side, a round wire H05VV-F 4x0,75or two single wires H05 VV H2-F 2x0,75mounted on side are recommended for effectivepull-relief. The clamping-insert is not used forthat.

Completely assembled lampholders with single-isolated wires are often offered by lamp holdermanufacturer. But they are only allowed to beinstalled in lamps and devices of the protectionclass I, because the lamp wires lead highvoltage.

An Electronic ballast FM is offered to enablee.g. the mounting in false ceilings or furniture,that is equipped with a double-isolated FM-mounting rail and the lamp wires. Applicationsaccording to the VDE standards are possiblewithout these wires by means of this set.

Figure: FM-lamp set

The pull-relief caps must be closed by means oftwo screws.

You have to meet the following minimumdistances to prevent an overheating of theElectronic ballast ML in its mountingsurrounding:

Chap.: 6.3 Page: 3

20

10

20Figure: Minimum distances cubic Electronic

ballast ML

The cylindrical housing:

The cubic Electronic ballast ML may not fit intofiligree lamps due to its length, as the lamp onlyprovides space in the lamp foot. Here thecylindrical Electronic ballast ML is a wisealternative:

66,5

78,53,6

20

Figure: Cylindrical housing Electronic ballast ML

It is designed for lamps of protection class I orfor SELV devices (Safety Extra Low Voltage).Following that, an installation in false ceilings orfurniture is not possible

Chap.: 6.4 Page: 1

6.4 Technical data:(The technical data , described here, have been up-to-date, when the Electronic Handbook waspublished. We reserve the right to change the technical data serving the technical progress and, thetechnical data are no more valid in case of changes. As the technical data are always up-to-date in theoperating instructions, which are delivered with the product, in important cases the operating instructionshould be taken for decision.).Abbreviation EVG (german: Elektronische Vorschaltgerät) = Electronic ballast

Parameter: EVG/ML 6W EVG/ML 8W EVG/ML 11W EVG/ML 13WNumber of lamps per EVG 1x 6W 1x 8W 1x 11W 1x 13WRated voltage (AC): 230 V, 50 HzRated voltage (DC): 230 V not permittedStart-up current: max. 8 A (Select mains switch according to it)Ambient temperature ta: 50 °CHousing temperature tc: 75 °CHousing dimensions: see figures in the descriptionLength of the output wiring: max. 1mConnection technology Cubic housing:

Pull-relief for an effective relief of themains sideRound wire e.g.: H05VV-F 2x0,75Flat wire e.g.: H05VV-H2-F2x0,75lamp sideRound wire e.g.: H05VV-F 4x0,75Flat wire e.g.: H05 VV H2-F 2x0,75Screw terminals for maximum cross-section of 2.5 mm 2

Cylindrical housing:assembled with connection wires

Protective measure: Cubic housing: Protection insulation, protection class IICylindrical housing: Covered construction for built-inlamps

Device functions:Dimmable noProtection function:Automatic switch-offin case of:

- Overtemperature of the lamp- Lamp ageing- False start-ups of the lamp- To high pin current- Defect of the filament

EMC-tested accord. toEN 61047EN 61000-4-2/4/5/11EN 55015

YesYesYes

Short-circuit proof YesOpen-circuit proof YesRFI suppressed YesProtection against fire: Switching-off of the input side in fault condition

Chap.: 7.1 Page: 1

7. Overvoltage protection in electrical installations

Overvoltages in the mains are a subject which isoften underestimated and often it is not wellknown. Before describing the devices for thedetailed protection more precisely, we willillustrate more clearly the complexity of thesubject. For this reason, it is explained in thenext chapters, which sources of overvoltages areexisting and which problems may occur by them.

7.1 GeneralIn trade and industry and even at home, we areconcerned by damages that are created byovervoltages in the mains network, as theapplications of electronic devices are increasing.

These overvoltages are often generated by director distant lightning strikes, electrostaticdischarges or by switching operations of non-resistive consumers.

7.1.1 Overvoltage protection due to lightning strikes

In the last years it was found by means ofthundery strikes, that electronic installations anddevices being up to 1.5 km away from thelightning strike are endangered. The reason is,overvoltages arrive at the installation by meansof both travelling waves and induced voltages.

In the private area device damages caused byovervoltages are often felt annoying andexpensive, but in industrial area such damagescan result in very serious consequences. A totalloss of data and a total defect of the computersystem are important to the existence of theconcerned company

But by means of modern technology, it ispossible to install an effective protection againstovervoltages of all kinds.Therefore a so-called "external lightningprotection" is required, which shall prevent majordamages in and at the building by means of fireor mechanical destruction.

The "internal lightning protection" extends theprotection against overvoltage damages byreducing the disturbing quantity to a value thatthe installation may withstand.

For that, the most essential measures are, e.g. acomplete equipotential bonding system and thebuilding and room shielding, and all parts of theinstallation are connected to the equipotentialbonding rail. All wires, all supply and informationsystem wires as well as metal tube wires, areincorporated indirectly.

Equipotential bonding rail

Water pipe

Gas pipe

Cable TV

Telecommunication wire

Heating pipe

Heating pipe

Mains connection

Foundation earth

MC

Sewagepipe

Aerial

Figure: Complete equipotential bonding system

Protective devices are classified into the twoclasses, protective devices for energy technologyand protective devices for information technologycorresponding to their task.A lightning arrester must be suitable to dischargelightning currents of 200 kA, and a surge arresterserves only for a relatively small surge current.

In approximation, it can be assumed, that thelightning current is distributed according to thefollowing figure.

100 %

50 %50 %

Earthingsystem

Equipotentialbonding rail

Information systemnetwork

Energy systemnetwork

Metal tubes

Roofconductor

Figure: Distribution of lightning current

In that, 50% of the current are flowing to theearthing system, and the remaining 50% aredistributed to the connected supply systems. Inthe worst case (a power supply network with Land PEN conductor) a load of 50 kA perconductor can appear.

Chap.: 7.1 Page: 2

7.1.2 Overvoltages due to electrostatic discharge

In comparison with the problems by lightningstrikes, which are external influences, theelectrostatic discharges are generated in theconcerned installation or room itself. The causesof electrostatic discharge are fitted carpets,clothes, shoes and others. In this process,voltages are generated up to 20 kV.

If a body, being charged, touches a surface,which has a conductive connection to the earth,the body is discharged immediately. Theoccurring currents (in the range of µA) are verysmall and do not engage humans and animals.But the electrical shock is felt unpleasantly.Although electronic devices and the wires in thesurroundings or PCB (Printed Wire Board) wirescan be damaged by the flowing dischargingcurrent. Even flash-overs can appear. Computersystems and the information technology networksare endangered Especially

e.g. fitted carpet

Figure: Electrostatic discharge by means of PC touching

7.1.3 Overvoltages due to electromagnetic pulses

Overvoltages, also called transients, are createdby switching processes within the installation andcan reach enormous values. The tripping pulse ofa 10A fuse is shown in the following figure:

U = 1700 V

Us = 325 V

t0

U

Sine half wave

Figure: Short-circuit pulse of a fuse

The figure shows, that a pulse of approx. 1700Vis created and a short oscillation is effective dueto the existing wire capacities and inductances.

This mains overvoltage or mains spikes arespread to all directions within the electricalinstallation and only in some cases, the cause isabsolutely found as a short-circuit

M

Short-circuit

TVSub-distr.

Mainscon.

Figure: Transient overvoltages

Very often the causes of overvoltages are noteasy to be found. By testing, it can be found insome cases, what device is responsible to theoccurring spikes. The normal procedure is toconnect a voltage recorder and to switch thedevices one by another. The correspondingdevice may be found then.

The exact length and amount of the spikes canbe determined in the installation only veryapproximately. Values measured by voltagerecorders can not be reproduced and therecorders very often present values above thecurrent loading of the installation.

The transient can be added at any time onto themains voltage and they can have different lengthand amount and with that different energycontents.

The power supply network also influences thespreading of the transients. The internalresistance of the mains is mainly responsible,how the spike spreads out in the installation.

Transients are attenuated very high by means of"very hard mains network", i.e. a mains networkwith very low internal resistance. The distance tothe transformer station, supplying the consumer,defines if either a hard mains network or a softmains network exists.

Chap.: 7.2 Page: 1

7.2 Ascertain the possible overvoltages

In order to plan the installation with a sufficientprotection, it must be ascertain, which values ofovervoltages will appear. Two mains groups aredefined due to its causes.

7.2.1 External overvoltagesExternal overvoltages are defined as influences,which are caused outside of the protectedsystem, and they reach the system by means ofthe connection wires, or they are created byinductive or capacitive coupling of the system.The definition includes the galvanic coupling withhigh voltage potential, disturbances on the wiresand lightning strikes.The wave form, amplitude and frequency are not,or only insufficiently known in the most cases.Thus, a mathematical calculation of theovervoltage protection is hardly to achieve. Thisis the reason, the test standards are applied andthe components are complying with them. Wehave to take into account an oversizedcalculation to achieve a reliable protection.

7.2.2 Internal overvoltagesInternal overvoltages are defined as influences,which are caused inside the protected system.The definition includes again galvanic couplingswith high potential level (e.g. mains and lowvoltage wires), electrostatic flash-over, switchingof inductive consumers as well as inductive andcapacitive couplings.

The maximum occurring overvoltages of theinternal overvoltages can be calculated bymeans of "worst case conditions", and even beascertained by a test. Although the installedprotective devices must comply with specialtesting standards.

7.2.3 Test pulsesOvervoltage protective devices are classified indifferent classes, due to their capabilities andusage, and thus test standards exist in everyclass. Devices of the class Basic protection andMedium-level protection are tested by essentiallyhigher criterias as devices of the class Detailedprotection. This allows to describe the protectivefunction of the devices by means of comparabledata.

The wave form (8/20) µs of the important testcurve is shown in the following diagram. Thiswave form is used to specify also the technicaldata of the discharge current. The total amountof the current is dependent on the installationplace of the protective device.

20

80

10

50

90

100I

(%)

t (µs)

Diagram: Surge current with wave form (8/20) µs

Chap.: 7.3 Page: 1

7.3 Components for overvoltage protection

Various components can be used for overvoltageprotection depending on the purpose and therequired features.For this purpose very often gas-filled arresters,varistors, suppressor diodes or a combination ofthem are used.The behaviour of the components is described indetails in the following chapters.

7.3.1 Gas-filled arrestersGas arresters, also called spark gaps or gas-filledarrester, are very high-resistive (in the range ofMΩ) in the non-ignited state. In the conductivestate, they have a short-circuit with a remainingvoltage of approx. 10V.Gas-filled arresters are classified in voltagecategories. The response time of the 700V typeis shown in the following diagram. It is visible,that the gas-filled arrester is ignited after approx.=0.7 µs.

00,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1,0

0,7

0,2

200

200

400

600

800

1000

700 V

V 1kVµs

µs

Diagram: Response time of a gas-filled arrester

The internal construction of the gas-filled arresterand its characteristic is shown in the followingfigures.

Terminal Ignition aidElectrode

Dischargeregion

Insulator

ElectrodeActivatingcompound

Glassceremic

Figure: Construction of a gas-filled arrester

45030000

10 -11

150

10 -10

10 -2

10 -1

10 0

10 1

10 2

10 3

10 4

10 5

I / A

U / V

Dependentdischarge

Transition area

Glow discharge

Sparc-over discharge

Figure: Characteristic HB of a gas-filled arrester

Gas-filled arresters are suitable for a wide rangeof applications, which start from the Basicprotection to the Detailed protection. Adisadvantage is the relatively high ignitionvoltage and their response time.

7.3.2 Varistors (VDR-resistors)Varistors are semiconductor devices, thatresistance change from a very high value to avery low value and the behaviour is independenton the direction.

Chap.: 7.3 Page: 2

U / V

I / A

100 200 300

-100 -200 -3001

2

3

-3

-2

-1

Figure: Characteristic of a varistor

The name is derived from the wording variableresistor. Very often the abbreviation VDRresistor appears which is deviated from voltagedependent resistor.The varistor is connected in parallel to theelectronic being protected and in case of a risingvoltage, it forms a low-resistive shunt andprevents a further rise of the transient.By means of the extraordinary current capacityand its very fast response time (< 25 nsec), it isthe almost perfect protective element.The varistor reaches its limit value in a short time(see diagram Response time of a varistor) and isfaster, but its discharge capacity is less than agas-filled arrester.

0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 1,2

-0,2-0,4200

400

600

800

1000

320 V

320 V400

µs

V

maximum operatingpeak- voltage

(230 V + 10% = 253 V)

Diagram: Response time of a varistor

Structure:The component exists of sintered zinc oxidegrains, which are smelted in coat of epoxy.

Terminals

Electrodes Epoxy

Sintered zincoxide grains

Figure: Structure of varistor

To understand the function of a varistor, a modelwith diodes can help.The areas touching the zinc oxide grains formmicro varistors, that have a characteristic of asymmetric Zener-diode with a reverse voltage ofapprox. 3.5 V.

I

10 bis 50 µmIntermediate phaseZinc oxideMicro varistor

V

3,5 V

100µA

Figure: Detailed illustration of varistor

The electrical behaviour of the varistor is givenby means of switching these z-diodes in paralleland in series: If the height of the layer with thezinc oxide grains is increased, the protectivelevel is also increased (series-circuit), if thecross-section of the layer with the zinc oxidegrains is increased, the discharge capacity isincreased (parallel-circuit). Increasing the volumeof layer with the zinc oxide grains, increases thecapacity of the energy absorption (series andparallel circuit).Varistors with several characteristic data can bemanufactured by varying the quantities.

Varistors are classified by means of the operatingvoltage:If the voltage is 1.5 times exceeding, that leadsto the melting of the zinc oxide grains. Aremaining change of the features appears, as thenumber of the Z-diodes is reduced by means ofthe melting. The protective level of the varistor isdecreasing continuously, and perhaps, anincreased current is flowing at normal operationvoltage, which destroys the varistor by thermalheat. In extreme cases, the varistor can explodeat very high voltages. Consequently, it is oftenused with fuses or in encapsulated housings.

7.3.3 Suppressor diodesSuppressor diodes (e.g. Transil-diodes) aresemiconductor devices, that show a similarbehaviour as the Z-diodes. The peak reversevoltage URM of a diode has to be higher or asequal as the operating voltage of the circuit to beprotected. The current increases in avalanchesby means of the diode connected in parallel andin reverse direction, when the voltage exceedsonly slightly. This effect is called avalanche-effect. Suppressor diodes are thus called

Chap.: 7.3 Page: 3

avalanche-diodes. The response times are in therange of some nsec (nano second = thousandmillionth second)

U

I

URM

URM

Diagram: Characteristic of a suppressor diode

The characteristic of the bi-directional suppressordiode is shown, i.e. a voltage limitation iseffective in both directions. They are designed todischarge high transient voltages. Adisadvantage is the relatively high price and areduced ability to discharge energy.

The main application is the protection of devices,electronic assemblies and expensivecomponents. Suppressor diodes can be classifiedas a detailed protection, built in the device.

7.3.4 Combination of arc-filled arrester and varistor

Very often a combination of varistor and gas-filled arrester is used for overvoltage limitation.These components complement each othertogether perfectly in some applications.When a load with a transient is occurring in aseries circuit of these components, the followingvoltages are effective:

0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1,0 1,200

µs0,02 0,7

200

400

600

320 V

800

1000

700 V

V 1

In ignitionmode

In operatingmode

Gas-filled arrester in function

Varistor in function

Only valid for theduration of the impulse

Gas

-fille

d ar

rest

er

Var

isto

r

kVµs

Characteristic: Series circuit of varistor and gas-filled arrester

Chap.: 7.4 Page: 1

7.4 Devices with overvoltage protection

The components, described in the abovechapters, are used in the devices for the Detailedprotection. They are already installed in theelectronic assemblies to protect the high-gradeand sensitive components as well as in devicesthat are designed for an additional overvoltageprotection. All devices, described in the chapterbelow, are suitable for the overvoltage protectionaccording to the chapter 7. They are not suitablefor the attenuation of static and excessivevoltages, e.g. the false installation of a product totwo outer conductors (L1 and L2 à 400 V)instead to L and N with 230 V.They are also not suitable, to carry increasedvoltages in a mains line due to an incorrectinstalled neutral conductor shift within the Three-Phase-Network.The components will be destroyed by means ofpermanently excessive operating overvoltage.

7.4.1 Protection against overvoltage built in the devices

Almost all electronic devices of the homeinstallation are equipped with overvoltageprotection components or circuits. On the onehand, this may be a Z-diode or suppressor diodeto protect one single semiconductor componentthat is more sensitive than others. On the otherhand, it may be an especially designed circuitwith several protective devices, to achieve a"total device protection".

Many causes of interferences are prevented atthe beginning of the design and manufacturing ofelectronic components by means of meeting thevalid standards (VDE, EC-standards, IEC testspecifications), Consequently, for example, allTRONIC-transformer contain a spike protectionaccording to DIN VDE 0712 Part 25 / EN 61047.For further information, see chapter 4.4,overvoltage protection in low voltageinstallations.

Nevertheless in many cases, it is necessary toinstall additional protective measures, becausethe loads by overvoltages in an installationexceed the values, which are specified in thestandard.Each protection, built in the device, is classifiedas a Detailed protection and is not able todischarge pulses with high energy.

7.4.2 TRONIC-overvoltage protection module

In larger installations fluorescent lamps, highintensity discharge lamps (e.g. High pressuresodium or mercury lamps), conventional woundtransformers and other inductive components areinstalled apart from other electronic components.Such installations are also called mixedinstallations.

Switching-on and off of such loads, high-energypulses (spikes) may be created, and theovervoltage protection circuit (according to VDE0712/25) is not sufficient which is integrated inthe electronic components. If it is not possible toreduce this internal overvoltages to a tolerablequantity by means of the installations measures,shown in the figures 4.4 and 7.7, TRONICovervoltage protection modules may be installedfor the reduction of the mains spikes.

The overvoltage protection module contains avaristor, i.e. a voltage dependent resistor, whichis low-resistive to impulse with high-voltage andit shorts them (see chapter 7.3.2). In addition, thevaristor in the module is thermally monitored bymeans of a temperature switch and isdisconnected from the mains in severesituations. Thus, it is ensured, that the varistordoes not explode suddenly.

ϑ

L (N)

N (L)

Principle circuit: Overvoltage protection

The module is destroyed after a switching of thetemperature switch, can not be repaired and hasto be replaced by a new one. Today, no damagesof the module are known which have beengenerated by means of switching processes,described above. It is designed as a built-indevice and may be fitted into distribution boxesas well as to the terminals of the device, beingprotected, i.e. in the false ceiling. We have givenup the integration of indication lamps, as theywould not be visible in these installations.

The module is connected in parallel and as closeas possible to the components being protected.In chapter 4.4 some information has beendescribed for the installation of these modules.

Chap.: 7.4 Page: 2

7.4.3 Socket outlet with surge voltage protection and acoustic signal

The outlet, type flush-mounting (UP), contains acircuit that removes the surge voltage from theconnected devices. This is technically realized bymeans of voltage dependent resistors, e.g.varistors or gas-filled arresters.

Outletcover

Indications

Cover frame58-mm box

230 V

The socket outlet reduces the surge voltage,occurring in short times, to a tolerable quantity ofthe electronic device. The connected loads areprotected against damages by means of this.

Function:The operating mode of the varistors is detectedby means of a temperature control, and in caseof exceeding the limits, the temperature switchdisconnects the branch being protected. Insevere cases the protection circuit is not inoperation. As the power supply of the device isnot disconnected in these cases, this mode hasto be indicated.

The function mode is visible by means of twoindication lamps. The green lamp indicates, thatmains voltage is applied to the protective circuit.When the red indication lamp is brightening, thetemperature switch has been triggered and thesurge protection is no more effective. Anacoustic signal is sounding. As a result of this,the user is informed about the failing of the surgeprotection, although the socket outlet is notvisible. The acoustic warning signal may beswitched-off by removing the plug from thesocket outlet. It is required to replace the outletimmediately. These facts are obvious from thefollowing principle circuit.L

N

PE IndicationGREEN

IndicationRED

ϑ

not protected protected

Figure: Principle circuit Surge protection socket outlet with acoustic signal

7.4.4 Line filter with surge protectionHigh sensitive electronic devices may not be onlyinterfered or destroyed by mains spikes, but alsoby means of high frequency. Examples are dataprocessing systems, medical equipment, high-grade components of the video or audio area,control, measurement and regulation installationsetc.

Example 1: Switching of an air-type contactor

U

U

t

Ueff = 230V

Sine (50Hz)

f > 3 kHz

Overvoltage peaks up to 750 V

Diagram: Switching of an air-type contactor

Surges of approx. 750 V may occur by means ofa switching air-type contactor. Also oscillationswith frequencies > 3 kHz appear.

Example 2: Switching-off of a fluorescent lamp. 36 W, unbalanced

2 4 6 8 MHzf

t

U

Uup to 600 V

Overvoltage peaksup to 3 kV

Diagram: Switching of a fluorescent lamp, 36W unbalanced

Chap.: 7.4 Page: 3

Unbalanced fluorescent lamps at first cause asmall re-oscillation and then a high transientpulse, which then is changing into a highfrequency re-oscillation of approx. 8 MHz.The transient voltage peaks have to bedischarged by means of the overvoltageprotection in both cases and the following high-frequency have to be attenuated by a HF-filter.The device offering these both functions is theLine filter, that is designed as a mobile device.It is pre-connected to the device being protected.The part overvoltage protection is operatingaccording to the principles described in chapter7.4.3.The varistors used are thermally monitored anddisconnected from the mains in case ofoverloading. However, the device still remains infunction.

Additionally a filter is integrated, that attenuatesthe high-frequency interferences. It affectssymmetrical and asymmetrical interferences.

Schuko outletSchukoplug

FuseT 10 / 250 D

Indications

Figure: Line filter

Symmetrical interferences voltages occurbetween all conductors carrying current,asymmetrical interferences occur between eachconductor carrying current and the earthpotential. The principle circuit is shown in thefollowing figure.

Non-protected area (input Protected area (output)

L

N

PE

ϑϑ

ϑ

IndicationRED

IndicationGREEN

ϑ

Figure: Principle circuit of the Line filter

In the diagram shown below, the principletransmission characteristic of the filter is shown.With it, the interferences are suppressed, whichare effective in the TV and Audio range. Theattenuation is presented in logarithmic scale. Anattenuation of 10 is equal to 20 dB and60 dB is equal to an attenuation of 1000.

Replacing the fuse:Pull off the fuse holder at the side of the housingand replace the fine-wire fuse T 10/250 D.Please note, that only devices can be connectedto the Line filter which have a maximum ratedcurrent of 10 A.

The integrated lamps indicate:

GREEN on: Device in operation

GREEN off: Mains fuse has tripped ormains voltage fails

RED on: Temperature fuse of theovervoltage protectionhas triggered, the protective device has to be replaced.

Chap.: 7.4 Page: 4

0

20

40

60

100

80

103 104 105 106 107 108

a / dB

f / Hz

sym.

asym.

Diagram: Transmission characteristic of the Line filter

Chap.: 7.5 / 7.6 Page: 1

7.5 Graduated protectionTo achieve a comprehensive overvoltage pro-tection in a building, it is sensible, to reduce theovervoltage pulses in stages by means of grad-ing the protective components.The devices limiting the overvoltage, are con-nected according to the reduced limitation volt-age and the energy absorption. Consequently,high energy transient voltages, which are coupledinto the power supply network, are dischargedwhen entering the installation (basic protection).This category includes the complete equipotentialbonding and discharge sections. This basic pro-tection is used in the transformer station and inthe main distribution board.

A further attenuation of the transients is realizedin the sub-distribution board. We call thatmedium-level protection, and very often gas-filled arresters and varistors are used.

For completion of the overvoltage protection thedetailed protection is defined according to thesensivity against overvoltages of the devicesbeing protected.

The detailed protection includes devices, e.g. theovervoltage protection socket outlet, the Linefilter and the TRONIC overvoltage protectionmodule. The effect is realized because thedevice being protected is connected in parallel tothe overvoltage protection circuit.

A symbolic presentation of the graduatedprotection is shown in the following figure:

Overland long-distance cable

Transformer of the electricity board

Main distributionboard

Sub-distributionboard Socket outlet

Basic Medium-level Detailed protection

Figure: Graduated protection

7.6 Insulation measurementVDE 0100, Part 600, requires an insulationmeasurement of the installation and in parallel, itgives information about possibly wrongmeasurements due to the protection devicesconnected. They distort the measured values dueto it components limiting the voltage.

You have to note in general:

In case of insulation measurements in aninstallation, always disconnect allovervoltage protection devices. Otherwisethe test voltage is limited by the protectioncomponents, and wrong measurements willbe carried out.

If overvoltage protection devices should remainby mistake in the installation, they will not bedamaged by means of the small currents.

This disconnection applies to all devices, whichhave integrated overvoltage protectioncomponents, for example, TRONIC-transformersthat contain a varistor in its input circuit.

A galvanic separation is ensured by acommercially used installation switches. That isnot affecting a touch-dimmer. It has to bedisconnected from the mains.

Chap.: 7.7 Page: 1

7.7 Notes for installation

The kind of installation has an essential influenceonto the overvoltage stress of every consumer.The coupling of transient can be reducedenormously by means of suitable measures.

7.7.1 Coupling of transientsIn general, the wires protected againstovervoltage should be as short as possible.Protected (overvoltage reducing) wires shouldnot be laid in a parallel or in bundles, e.g. in acommon wiring channel. Such an installationcreates the danger of new coupling of transients(see also chapter 4.4)

In order to show the possibilities of couplingtransients, some examples are illustrated in thefollowing figures.

Example 1:

A coupling of overvoltages can not be excluded,if wires are lying side by side behind the socketoutlet.

230 V

not protected

supposed tobe protected

Coupling

Figure: Possible coupling

Example 2:If high surges occur, even a coupling from onewall to another is possible without any trouble. Inthis example the data processing system isprotected, but not the wire on the backside. Thetransients spread into both directions of themains wire.

230 V

Figure: Coupling to opposite lying walls

Example 3:

A weak point, not able to be controlled, is thecoupling of transient in multiple portable socketsas transients can be coupled into the leads due toits position. An overvoltage protection socketoutlet has to be fitted generally in the multipleportable sockets. (see figures Unfavourable /favourable use of an overvoltage protectionsocket outlet)

230 V

Coupling

Unfavourableposition of the lead

Figure: Unfavourable use of an overvoltage protection socket outlet

Chap.: 7.7 Page: 2

230 V

Coupling

Herewrong !

230 V

Herecorrect !

Position of leadsunfavourable

Figure: More favourable use of an overvoltage protection socket outlet

7.7.2 Propagation of transientsIf a fuse trips under load, a short circuit pulse iscreated which is added to the mains voltage (seechapter 7.1.3). The propagation is effective in alldirections. The pulse is less attenuated bymeans of the wire length respectively thecoupling of the parallel lying wires.

A B

A

A

BB

BB

Attenuation bymeans of wire lengthre. indirect coupling

Figure: Propagation of transients

A general solution is not possible, but anenormous attenuation takes place, if overvoltageprotection socket outlets are installed.

A B

A

A

DE

BB

Attenuation by means of the wirelength and the built-in overvoltageprotection components

230 V

230 V230 V

B

C

C D E FF

Figure: Propagation of transients by means of overvoltage protection socket outlets

Chap.: 7.8 Page: 1

7.8 Technical data:(The technical data, described here, have been up-to-date, when the Electronic Handbook waspublished. We reserve the right to change the technical data serving the technical progress and, thetechnical data are no more valid in case of changes. As the technical data are always up-to-date in theoperating instructions, which are delivered with the product, in important cases the operating instructionshould be taken for decision.).

• Overvoltage protection module

Rated voltage: 230 V / 50 Hz

Rated discharge current ISN (8/20) µs: 1 kA (100x)

Max. discharge surge currentiSmax (8/20) µs: 4.5 kA (1x)

Remaining voltage at I S (1 kA): approx. 1000 V

Operating temperature: -25 to +80 °C

Terminals: flexible 1.5 mm 2 , 80 mm long

Installation: in parallel to the protected device or operating circuit

Protection capacity: 1 module for approx. 5 -10 TRONIC-transformers in each circuit

• Socket outlet with surge voltage protection and acoustic signal

Rated voltage: 230 V / 50 Hz

Rated current: 16 A

Temperature fuse: Disconnection of the protection component at overload

Rated discharge current iSN (8/20) µs: 2,5 kA

Max. discharge surge currentiSmax (8/20) µs: 5 kA (1x)

Protective level: ≤ 1.2 kV between L and N≤ 1.5 kV L/N and PE

Class of requirements: D

Operating temperature: -20 to +60°C

Installation: ∅ 58 mm flush-box, wiring channels, etc. replacing the existing socket outlet in front of the consumer being protected

IndicationsGREEN on: Device in operationGREEN off: Mains voltage failsRED on + acoustic signal: Temperature fuse of the overvoltage protection has been

triggered (replace protection device), remove the mains plug for switching-off the acoustic signal triggered

Chap.: 7.8 Page: 2

• Line filter with over voltage protection

Rated voltage: 230 V / 50 Hz

Rated current: 10 A

Fine-wire fuse: T 10 / 250 D, DIN 41571 T3

Rated discharge current iSN (8/20) µs: 2.5 kA

Max. discharge surge current: iSmax (8/20) µs: 6.5 kA (1x)

Protection level: ≤ 1 kV

Class of requirements: D

Max. leakage discharge current: 0.5 mA

Climatic class: according to DIN 40 040, HPF

Operating temperature: -20 to +40°C

RFI suppression filter: according to VDE 0565 T3

IndicationsGREEN on: Device in operationGREEN off: Mains voltage failsRED on + acoustic signal: Temperature fuse of the overvoltage protection has been

triggered (replace protection device), remove the mains plug for switching-off the acoustic signal triggered

Supplement: 0 Page: 1

SupplementMODULAR ELECTRONIC HANDBOOK

Application circuit

Contents

Chapter 1. Dimmer and switches

1.1 Electronic switches and push buttons1.1.1 Switches1.1.2 Push buttons

1.2 Phase-cut-on control dimmer1.2.1 Dimmer with rotary knob1.2.1.1 Dimmer with rotary on/off switch or push switch1.2.1.2 Dimmer with push switch1.2.1.2.1 Dimmer for incandescent lamps and LV dimmer for conventional

transformer1.2.1.2.2 Dimmer for fluorescent lamps1.2.1.2.3 Speed regulator1.2.2 Dimmer with touch operation1.2.3 Remote control dimmer1.2.4 Power extensions

1.3 Phase-cut-off-control dimmer for TRONIC-transformers1.3.1 Dimmer with rotary on/off switch : „TRONIC-Dimmer“1.3.2 Dimmer with/for touch operation:

„TRONIC-touch dimmer“ and „TRONIC-recessed dimmer“1.3.3 Remote control dimmer: „IR-TRONIC-touch dimmer“1.3.4 Power extension: „TRONIC-light control system“

1.4 Electronic potentiometer for 10 V control input

Chapter 2. Observer

2.1 Observer for surface mounting2.2 Observer for flush mounting2.3 Observer system

Chapter 3. DEVICES WITH AUTOMATIC TIME FUNCTION

3.1 Electronic controller for shutter and blinds3.2 Electronic Timer

Chapter 4. ELECTRONIC TRANSFORMER

Chapter 5. CURRENT GUARD

Chapter 6. ELECTRONIC BALLAST FOR MINIATURE FLUORESCENT LAMPS

Supplement: 1 Page: 1

1. Dimmer and switches

1.1 Electronic switches and push buttons1.1.1 Switches

Mains230 V

LN

Load

1

Push-relay switch

N

One-way switch circuit with push-relay switch

Mains230 V

LN

Load

Extension,for example type A

1

Push-relay switch

1

mech.push button

N

C For illumination of the extension "C" is only necessary

Operation with one extension (Function equal to 2-way switch circuit)

Mains230 V

LN

Load

Extensionfor example type A

1

Push-relay switch

11

mech.push button

N

C C CTo furtherpush-relay switchextensions

L may als o be connected to the extensions

mech.push button

Extensionfor example type A

Operation with two extensions (Function equal to 4-way switch circuit )

Supplement: 1 Page: 2

Mains230 V

LN

Load

Receiver

1 N

Switch

IR-switch

One -way switch circuit with IR-switch

1

Mains230 V

LN

Load

Extension type A ormechanical switch

Only for illuminatedextensions

Receiver

1 N

Switch

IR-switch

Operation with one extension (Function equal to 2-way switch circuit)

1

Mains230 V

LN

LoadExtension type A ormechanical switch

Only for illuminatedextensions

To further extensions

1

Receiver

1 N

Switch

IR-switch

Operation with two extensions (Function equal to 4-way switch circuit )

Supplement: 1 Page: 3

LN

1 2 3 4

Power unit

Channel selector switch

N

LAC 230 V ~

brown

greenyellow

white

IR-receiver

Emergencypush button

max. 10 m

Wiring IR-recessed switch

Supplement: 1 Page: 4

1.1.2 Push buttons

Mains230 V

LN

Load

Extension,e.g. type A

IR-extension

1

Receiver

IR-main unit,e.g. IR-push button

Receiver

IR-push buttonwith permanentpulse

1 N1

mech.push-button

IR-push button with permanent pulse as an extension

IR-receiver

Emergencypush button

max. 10 m

Device 4e.g. TRONIC-recessed dimmer

Device 3e.g. dimmer for conv. transformers

Device 2e.g. TRONIC-recessed dimmer

Devicee.g. push-relay switch

Load

Load

Load

Load

Assignment of mainsto any push button output

Wiring of IR-extention push button 4channel in principle

Supplement: 1 Page: 5

IR-receiver

Emergencypush button

Brown

Green Yellow

Whitemax. 10 m

e.g. TRONIC-recessed dimmer

Load

Attention: All devices of the same load circuit,e.g. dimmers, power boosters andextensions (flush mounting) have to be connected to the same load!

Push buttonflush, NO

IR- extension push button 4channel Eb, example of a circuit with a manual extension

Supplement: 1 Page: 6

1.2 Phase-cut-on dimmer1.2.1 Dimmer with rotary knob1.2.1.1 Dimmer with rotary on/off switch or push switch

Dimmer

Mains230 V

LN

Rotary-off dimmer, suitable only for incandescent lamps, 2-way or 4-way switch circuits not possible

1.2.1.2 Dimmer with push switch

1.2.1.2.1 Dimmer for incandescent lamps and LV dimmer for conventional transformers

Dimmer type Permitted load type (x = permitted):TRONIC-

transfomerConventionaltransformer

HV halogenlamp

HV-Halogen

Incandescentlamp

Fluorescentlamp

Bal.

Dimmer forincandescentlamps

- - - x -

LV-dimmer forconv. transf.

- x x x -

Dimmer

Mains230 V

LN

Load

1-way switch circuit

Supplement: 1 Page: 7

Mains230 V

LN

Load

PDimmer

2-wayswitch

2-way switch circuit

Mains230 V

LN

Load

PDimmer

P

2-way switch

P

4-way switch

4-way switch circuit

Supplement: 1 Page: 8

1.2.1.2.2 Dimmer for fluorescent lamps

Dimmer type Permitted load type (x = permitted):TRONIC-

transfomerConventionaltransformer

HV halogenlamp

HV-Halogen

Incandescentlamp

Fluorescentlamp

Bal.

Dimmer forfluorescentlamps

- - - x x

2Dimmer for fluorescent lamps

1

LNPE

3

8

4

9 7 6 5

To furtherlamps

1 Adjustment of the basic brightness (potentiometer)2 Basic load (Incandescent lamp 25 W)3 Ballast4 Heating transformer5 38 mm lamp without starter6 Ignition support (When required, connect earth wire according to the selection list for lamps)7 Clip for earthing the ignition support8 Compensation capacitor9 Earth wire depending on the fluorescent lamp type

RFI class N is only achieved withlamps, that are pre-wired for thebrightness control and comply RFIclass N.

1-way switch circuit with unsymmetrical ballast

2Dimmer forflourescent lamps

1

LNPE

3

8

4

9 7 6 5

To furtherlamps P

2-wayswitch

2-way switch circuit with unsymmetrical ballast

Supplement: 1 Page: 9

2Dimmer for fluorescentlamps

1

LNPE

3

8

4

9 7 6 5

To furtherlamps P P

2-wayswitch

P

4-way switch

4-way switch circuit with unsymmetrical ballast

2Dimmer forfluorescent lamps

1

LNPE

3

8

4

9 7 6 5

To furtherlamps

1-way switch circuit with symmetrical ballast2-way and 4-way switch circuit according to the connection of fluorescent lamps with unsymmetrical ballast

1

LNPE

To furtherlamps

To furtherlamps

To furtherlamps

Powerbooster

Dimmer forfluorescent lamps 2

1

2

1

4

9 7 6 5

8

3 3

8

4

9765

1-way switch circuit with a Power booster2-way and 4-way switch circuit and connection of a symmetrical ballast according to a dimmer for fluorescent lampswithout Power booster

Supplement: 1 Page: 10

2Dimmer forfluorescent lamps

1

LN

5

6

7

8 4

3

2

1

Electronicballast

5

To furtherlamps

Filter

Dimmer circuit for fluorescent lamps with 26 mm diameter and electronic ballast2-way and 4-way switch circuit according to the connection of fluorescent lamps with unsymmetrical ballast

1.2.1.2.3 Speed regulator

Speedregulator M

MotorAdjustment ofbasic speed

Mains230 V

LN

~

Supplement: 1 Page: 11

1.2.2 Dimmer with touch operation

Dimmer type Permitted load type (x = permitted):TRONIC-

transfomerConventionaltransformer

HV halogenlamp

HV-Halogen

Incandescentlamp

Fluorescentlamp

Bal.

Touch dimmerforincandescentlamps

- - - x -

LV touchdimmer forconv.transformers

- x x x -

Mains230 V

LN

1

Touchdimmer

LoadMemory

Touch key

On/off circuit

Mains230 V

LN

1

Touchdimmer

LoadMemory

1

mech.push button

Extensione.g.type A

C Wire C is necessary only in casetouch dimmer extension shall beilluminated.(Not for TRONIC-touch dimmer)

Operation with one extension (Function is equal to 2-way switch circuit)

Mains230 V

LN

1

Touchdimmer

LoadMemory

1

Extensione.g. type A

C1

mech.push button

CTo furthertouch dimmerextensions(type A)

mech.push button

Operation with two extensions (Function is equal to 4-way switch circuit)

Supplement: 1 Page: 12

1.2.3 Remote control dimmer

Dimmer type Permitted load type (x = permitted):TRONIC-

transfomerConventionaltransformer

HV halogenlamp

HV-Halogen

Incandescentlamp

Fluorescentlamp

Bal.

IR-touch dimmer forincandesent lamps

- - - x -

IR-LV- touch dimmerfor conv. transformers

- x x x -

Mains230 V

LN

Load

Memory

IR-touch dimmer

1

Dimmer

Receiver

On/off switch circuit IR-touch dimmer and IR-LV-touch dimmer

L Mains230 VN

Load

Extensione.g. type A

1

mech.Taster

Memory

IR-touch dimmer

1

Dimmer

Receiver

Wire C for illuminatedextension only

C

Operation with one extension for IR-touch dimmer and IR-LV-touch dimmer (Function is equal to 2-wayswitch circuit)

Mains230 V

LN

Load

Extensione.g. type A

Memory

IR-touch dimmer

11

mech.push button

1

Dimmer

Receiver

C CWire C for illuminatedextensions only

Extensione.g. type A

mech.push button

Operation with two extensions for IR-touch dimmer and IR-LV-touch dimmer (Function is equal to 4-wayswitch circuit)

Supplement: 1 Page: 13

1.2.4 Power extension

Mains230 V

LN

Power booster

1

To (load) terminalof the dimmer

To furtherPower boosters(Terminal 1)

Power booster (flush) in connection with dimmer for incandescent lamps

Netz230 V

LN

Power booster

1

To fluorescent lamp

Resistive basic load

To (load) terminalof the dimmer

All heating transformersmust be connectedto the terminalof the dimmer

To furtherPower boosters(Terminal 1)

Power booster (flush) in connection with dimmer for fluorescent lamps

Mains230 V

LN

max. 10L 1 N

1N N

1N N

1

LV-touch dimmer

LV-recessedPower booster

max. 500 W

max. 600 W

max. 600 W

1

Extension

LV-recessedPower booster

LV-recessed Power booster 600WExample in connection with LV-touch dimmer and extension

Supplement: 1 Page: 14

I >I >

L1L2L3N

N NL3 L3

max.16Amax.16A

2 pole MCB-

max. 3500 W max. 3500 W

LV - Dimmer

LV Power booster

-

per 16 A MCB per 16 A MCB

ind. transformers ind. transfomers

max. 600 W max. 600 W

max. 600 Wmax. 600 W

max. 6500 W

max. 500 W

LV-recessed Power boostersCoupled MCBs at powers > 3500 W

Supplement: 1 Page: 15

1.3 Phase-cut-off dimmers for TRONIC-transformers

Dimmer type Permitted load type (x = permitted):TRONIC-

transfomerConventionaltransformer

HV halogenlamp

HV-Halogen

Incandescentlamp

Fluorescentlamp

Bal.

TRONIC-Dimmer x - x x -TRONIC-Touchdimmer

x - x x -

TRONIC recesseddimmer

x - x x -

IR-TRONIC Touchdimmer

x - x x -

1.3.1 Dimmer with push switch: „TRONIC-Dimmer“

Mains230 V

LN

Load

DimmerTRONIC-

On/off switch circuit

Mains230 V

LN

Load

P

2-wayswitch

DimmerTRONIC-

2-way switch circuit

Mains230 V

LN

Load

P P

2-wayswitch

P

4-way switch

DimmerTRONIC-

4-way switch circuit

Supplement: 1 Page: 16

1.3.2 Dimmer with touch operation or for touch operation: „TRONIC-touch dimmer“ and „TRONIC-recessed dimmer“

Mains230 V

LN

1

Load

Touch key

TRONIC-

dimmer

Memorytouch

On/off switch circuit

Mains230 V

LN

1

Last

1

mech.push button

Extensione.g.type A

TRONIC-

dimmer

Memorytouch

Operation with one extension (Function equal to 2-way switch circuit)

Mains230 V

LN

1

Load

1

Extensione.g. type A

1

mech.push button

To furthertouch dimmerextensions(type A)

TRONIC-

dimmer

Memorytouch

mech.push button

Operation with two extensions (Function equal to 4-way switch circuit)

Supplement: 1 Page: 17

Mains230 V

LN

1

1 TRONICrecesseddimmer

Memory

1

1

Control wires to terminal "1"of the Power boosters

mechan.push button

max. 700 W

Load

Wiring of TRONIC recessed dimmer in principle

1.3.3 Remote control dimmer: „IR-TRONIC touch dimmer“

Mains230 V

LN

Load

Memory

Dimmer

Receiver

1 N

IR-TRONIC touch dimmer

On/Off switch circuit IR-TRONIC touch dimmer

Mains230 V

LN

Load

Memory

Dimmer

Receiver

1 N

Extensione.g. type A

1

mech.push button

IR-TRONIC touch dimmer

Operation with one extension (Function equal to 2-way switch circuit)

Supplement: 1 Page: 18

Mains230 V

LN

Load

Memory

Dimmer

Receiver

1 N

IR-TRONIC touch dimmer

1

Extensione.g. type A

1

mech.push button

Extensione.g. type A

mech.push button

Operation with two extensions (Function equal to 4-way switch circuit)

1.3.4 Power extension:“TRONIC Light control system"

Mains230 V

LN

max.315 W

max. 10L 1 N

max. 700 W

max. 700 W

1N N

1N NTRONIC-

recessedPower booster

Load

Load

Load

TRONICdimmer

TRONIC-recessedPower booster

Wiring of TRONIC recessed Power booster in principle

Supplement: 1 Page: 19

L

N

to further

extensions

to further TRONIC-recessed Power booster

L 1 N L LN N

3 core 250 V cable,select the cross sectionaccording to the total load ofallpower boosters.(perhaps distributeon the cables)

up to 60 W : 2x1.0mm²up to 105 W: 2x1.5mm²up to 150 W: 2x2.5mm² > 150 W:entspr.aufteilen.

2x1.5 mm²

2x1.5 mm²

2x1.5 mm² 2x1.5 mm²

LV area

min60** W,max315 W

min100W,max700 WL

N

12 VTRONIC-trans.

to furtherTRONIC-transformers

2x1.5 mm²

LN

L

N

1

NNTRONIC-

recessedPower booster

11

ExtensionTypeA

* TRONIC*-touch dimmer

If aTRONIC-dimmer with push/changeswitch is installed,replace the extensions by a 2-wayor4-way switch!

*:

L

N

12 VTRONIC-trans.

L

N

12 VTRONIC-trans.

L

N

12 VTRONIC-trans.

to furtherTRONIC-transformers

Minimum load installingTRONIC-recessed power booster

**:

Wiring diagram of the TRONIC Light control system with UP TRONIC-dimmer (flush)

min60** W,max700 W

L

N

to further

extensions

L 1 N L LN N

3 core 250 V cable,select the cross sectionaccording to the total loadof all power boosters(perhaps distribute oncables) and protect by an-pole MCB

up to 60 W : 2x1,0mm²up to 105 W: 2x1,5mm²up to 150 W: 2x2,5mm² > 150 W:entspr.aufteilen.

2x1.5 mm²

2x1.5 mm²

2x1.5 mm²

2x1.5 mm²

LV area

ExtensionType A

3x1.5 mm²

LN

min100 W,max700 W

4 terminals only for the furtherTRONIC recessed Power boostersto terminal "1"

No connectionof further TRONICtransformers possible!

N1

TRONIC-

recessed Power

booster

1

TRONIC-recesseddimmer

1

L

N

1

NN

TRONICrecessedpower booster

L

Minimum load connectingTRONIC-recessed Power boosters

L

N

12 VTRONIC-trans.

L

N

12 VTRONIC-trans.

L

N

12 VTRONIC-trans.

L

N

12 VTRONIC-trans.

to further TRONIC-

recessed Power boosters

to further

TRONIC-transformers

to furtherTRONIC-trans. **:

Wiring diagram of the TRONIC Light control system with TRONIC-recessed dimmer

Supplement: 1 Page: 20

I >I >

L1L2L3N

N NL3 L3

max.16Amax.16A

2 pole MCB

max. 3680 W max. 3680 W

TRONIC-dimmer

TRONIC-transformerTRONIC-recessed Powerbooster

per 16 a MCB per 16A MCB

TRONIC-transformer TRONIC-transformer

Coupled MCBs in the TRONIC-Light control system with powers >3500W

Supplement: 1 Page: 21

1.4 Electronic potentiometer for 10 V input control

Adjustment ofbasic brightness

230 VLN

max.40 mA

XElectronicballast

L N

+ -

X

L N

+ -+ -

Electronicpotentiometer

Electronicballast

Principle circuit for a lamp load up to 1150 W

Adjustment ofbasic brightness

230 VLN

max.40 mA

X

L N

+ -

XElectronicballast

L N

+ -+ -

Electronicpotentiometer

Electronicballast

Principle circuit for a lamp load > 1150 W

Supplement: 2 Page: 1

2. Observer

2.1 Observer for surface mounting (Single devices)

T

N

L

N L

Observer in a 2-way switch circuit:(One automatic and one manual switch)T = Push button, break contact. Manual operationtriggers a switch cycle.

N

L

T

S1S2

N L

Switching off the observer:The observer is switched-on again, if switch S1 isactivated. S1 does not trigger the observer .

T

N

L

T N L

Observer in a 4-way switch circuit:(2 automatic and one manual switch)T = Push button, break contact.

T

N

L

N L N L

Observers in parallel circuit

L

N

S1 S2N L

Observer with automatic and manual operation:S1+S2 = open: all off; S1 closed, S2 closed:automatic operation; S1+S2 closed: permanentlight

N L

N

L

T

Observer in parallel connection with a staircaselighting switch or time pulse relay

Supplement: 2 Page: 2

2.2 Observer for flush mounting (Modular system with inserts and attachments)

N

L

S

Insert with triac in basic circuit:S switches-off the Observer. If switching-on, aswitch-on cycle is initiated, independent on thebrightness.

N

L

Parallel connection of inserts with triac:More favourable: Select insert with relay contact+ extension insert for this application.

N

L

TT

Combination of an insert with triac and severalmanual push buttons (normally close contact).You can select any the connection sequence.Important: Switch always the live wire andconnect the lamp to the neutral wire

NL

S1 N

Insert with relay contacts in basic circuit:S switches-off the Observer. If switching-on, aswitch-on cycle is initiated, independent on thebrightness.

N

L

T T 1 N

Inserts with relay contacts and manualextensions (normally close contacts)

L N

1 N

1 N

Å

Ç

É

Example of a circuit:Combination of insert with relay contacts (1) andan active extension (2) and a manual (passive)extension (3)

Supplement: 2 Page: 3

2.3 Observer systemAll wiring diagrams of the single observerspresented in 2.1 are suitable to be used for theObserver system power unit (surface mounting)on the mains side.

max.

Lxo

S

+-

Lx

Lxo

S

+-

Lx

Lxo

S

+-

Lx

+L

NLx

-S

1

2

3

8

x

System sensors (surface mounting) connected ina line:Only one Lx of the system sensors shall beconnected to the power unit!

max.

Lxo

S

+-

Lx

Lxo

S

+-

Lx

Lxo

S

+-

Lx

+L

NLx

-S

1

2

3

8

x

System sensors (surface mounting) connected ina star:Only one Lx of the system sensors shall beconnected to the power unit!

Lx S - +

Lx S - +

Lx S - +

A

1

2

8

System sensors (flush mounting) connected in aline:Only one Lx of the system sensors shall beconnected to the power unit (A)!

Lx S - +

Lx S - +

Lx S - +

1

2

8

A

A

A

System sensors (flush mounting) connected in astar:Only one Lx of the system sensors shall beconnected to the power unit (A)!

Supplement: 2 Page: 4

Lx S - +

A

Lx S - +

S-

T1

S1

1

2

„Tricky circuits“ in the Observer system:Opening switch S1, only system sensor 1 isdisconnected .Activating push button T1(normally open),triggers a switch cycle, independent on thebrightness("manual system sensor")

Lxo

S

+-LX

+L

NLx

-S

+L

NLx

-S

NOT PERMITTED! A system sensor (flush orsurface mounting) is not allowed to be connectedto several system power units.

1

2

8

max.100 m

Maximum length of the system sensor lengthwire.(Valid for all flush and surface mountingdevices!)

1

2

8

max. 100 mmax. 100 m

max. 100 m

Lx S - +

N L1 L1 4

1

Maximum length of the system sensor wire(Valid for all flush and surface mountingdevices!)

LN

N

Lx S -

4

1

L1 L1

+

80

Observer system power unit:Basic circuit

LN

N1

N

Lx S -

4

1

L1 L1

+

80

Observer system power unit REG 1 channelcombined with time switch

LN

1

2

N

Lx S -

4

1

L1 L1

+

80

Observer system power unit REG 1channel:Potential-isolated contact is connected to Lowvoltage. Connect point (1) and point (2) to theLow voltage load circuit.

Supplement: 2 Page: 5

A

B

N

Lx S -

4

1

L1 L1

+

80

Last

Observer system power unit REG 1channel:All wiring diagrams of the single observerspresented in 2.1 may be used for the Observersystem power unit (surface mounting) on themains side, if:A: An isolated wire bridge(1.5mm2) is

inserted according to the drawingB: Terminal ‘1’ is connected as the load

terminal (arrow showing out) of the single Observer

L

N

N

Lx 1 S1 - + Lx 2 S2 - +

L1 L2

8080

Observer system power unit REG 2channel:Operation at the same phase

L1L2N

N

Lx 1 S1 - + Lx 2 S2 - +

L1 L 2

8080

Observer system power unit REG 2channel:Operation at two phases

L

N

N

Lx 1 S1 - + Lx 2 S2 - +

L1 L 2

8080

Observer system power unit REG 2channel:Both channels switch (max. 16 system-sensors) acommon load (max. 2500 W).

L

N

N1

N

Lx 1 S1 - + Lx 2 S2 - +

L1 L 2

8080

Observer system power unit REG 2channel:Potential isolated contact of the second channelis combined with a time switch. Note thespecification of the load of the time switch!

L

N

S

N

Lx 1 S1 - + Lx 2 S2 - +

L1 L 2

8080

Observer system power unit REG 2channel:S disconnects channel 2 and does not effectchannel 1. No automatic re-switching-on, if thecontact is closed.

All wiring diagrams of the single observerspresented in 2.1 may be used for channel 1 ofthe Observer system power unit 2channel on themains sideAttention: After a mains failure at channel 1, bothchannels are activated for one cycle.

Supplement: 3 Page: 1

3. Devices with automatic functions

3.1 Electronic control for shutter and blinds

M

NL1

max. 1 Motor1000VA

N

AU

FA

BWiring diagram: Control of blinds

M1 M2

K1 K2

LN

N L

K1 K2

K1 K2

Operation of several motors (Variant 1)

M1 M2

K1 K2

LN

N L

K1 K2

K1 K2

Operation of several motors (Variant 2)

Supplement: 3 Page: 2

Einstellen

Enter

Man/Auto

AutoManuell

Zufall Astro

Tag Prog

DiMiDoFrSaSo

Mo

Woche

Separatingrelay

Central control Single control

M1 M3M2

Single control Single control

Mains3

22

3

4

332

Separatingrelay

Separatingrelay

Control of several motors, example of an application with separating relays

3.2 Electronic timer

N

NL1

max. 1000VA

Wiring diagram: Electronic timer

Supplement: 4 Page: 1

4. Electronic transformers

230 V

LN

ACAC 12 V ~~

Wiring diagramTRONIC-transformer SNT 70 cyl., SNT 105 cyl.

LN 12

V

230

VA

C

AC

~~

Wiring diagramTRONIC-transformer SNT 35

AC

12 V

230

VLN

~

AC

~

Wiring diagramTRONIC-transformer SNT 70, SNT 105

LN

AC

230

V~

12 VAC

~

Wiring diagramTRONIC-transformer SNT 150, SNT 200

LN

Overvoltage protection moduleTRONIC-Dimmer

L

N

L

N

L

N

L

N

TRONIC-transformer

LN

TRONIC-transformer

Overvoltage protection module

L

N

L

N

L

N

L

N

Connection of the overvoltage module with and without a TRONIC-dimmer

Supplement: 5 Page: 1

5. Current Guard

300 W250 W

200 W

150 W

100 W 50 W Reset

230 V~12 VL1

N

Wiring diagram: Current guard

Supplement: 6 Page: 1

6. Electronic ballast for mini fluorescent lamps

S

LN

LN

Lam

pe /

lam

p / t

ube

min

iatu

r

AC 230 V ~

EVG/ML

Wiring diagram EVG/ML, cubic construction

LNAC 230 V ~

Lam

pe /

lam

p / t

ube

min

iatu

rgrey

white

EVG/ML

Wiring diagram EVG/ML, cubic construction

Supplement: 6 Page: 2

Supplement: 6 Page: 3

Supplement: 6 Page: 4